-------
                             TABLE OF CONTENTS


                                                                    Page

PREFACE	      v

                              Maps of the USSR

     Orientation	    vii
     Climatic, Soil and Vegetation Zones 	   viii
     Major Economic Areas 	     ix
     Major Industrial Centers 	      x
     Principal Centers of Ferrous Metallurgy and Main
          Iron Ore Deposits 	     xi
     Principal Centers of Non-Ferrous Metallurgy and
          Distribution of Most Important Deposits of
          ^on-Ferrous Metal Ores 	    xii
     Principal Centers of the Chemical Industry and of
          the Textile Indus try 	   xiii
     Principal Centers of Wood-Working,  Paper, and Food
          Industries 	    xiv
     Main Mining Centers 	     xv
     Principal Electric Power Stations and Power Systems 	    xvi

BIOLOGICAL EFFECT OF LOW CARBON DIOXIDE  CONCENTRATIONS
          0.  V.  Yeliseyeva 	      1

HYGIENIC EVALUATION OF POLLUTION OF THE  ATMOSPHERE
     WITH HEXAMETHYLENEDIAMINE
          A.  Ye.  Kulakov 	     18

CONTAMINATION OF ATMOSPHERIC AIR WITH MALEIC ANHYDRIDE
     AND ITS HYGIENIC EVALUATION
          K.  V.  Grigor'yeva 	     30

BIOLOGICAL EFFECT OF LOW NITROBENZENE CONCENTRATIONS
    - IN ATMOSPHERIC AIR
          N.  G.  Andreyeshcheva	     44

LOW CONCENTRATIONS OF UNSATURATED HYDROCARBONS OF THE
     ETHYLENE SERIES IN AIR AROUND PETROCHEMICAL COMPLEXES
         Candidates of Medical Sciences  M.  L. Krasovitskaya
          and L.  K. Malyarova	     57
                                     111-

-------
                                                                        Page

THRESHOLD CONCENTRATIONS OF ACETOPHENONE DURING SHORT-
     AND LONG-TERM INHALATION
          Candidate of Medical Sciences N. B. Imasheva 	      79

CYCLOHEXANOL AND CYCLOHEXANONE IN ATMOSPHERIC AIR AND
     THEIR HYGIENIC SIGNIFICANCE
          A. A. Dobrinskiy 	      94

ON THE COMBINED ACTION OF THREE MINERAL ACIDS
          Candidate of Medical Sciences V. P. Melekhina 	     106

TOXICITY OF SULFUR OXIDES UNDER CONDITIONS OF LONG-TERM
     CONTINUOUS EXPOSURE
          Decent K. A. Bushtuyeva	     114

BIOLOGICAL ACTION OF LOW MANGANESE CONCENTRATIONS DURING
     INHALATIONAL EXPOSURE
          Candidates of Medical Sciences F. V. Dokuchayeva
          and N. N. Skvortsova 	     139

MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE CONCENTRATIONS OF NOXIOUS SUBSTANCES
     IN THE ATMOSPHERIC AIR OF POPULATED AREAS
          Professor V. A. Ryazanov and Professor M.  S. Gol'dberg ....     149
                                     IV

-------
                                  PREFACE
     The present volume consists of reports dealing with a number of
investigations conducted in the Soviet Union at its various public health
institutes and in departments of public health of some universities.

     The great strides in the development of industrial chemistry in the
country has stimulated studies of the biological effects of chemical air
pollutants as well as studies dealing with public health implications of
these pollutants.  Such studies assume an ever-increasing importance in the
Soviet Union.

     The results of these investigations provide a basis for the establish-
ment of a nexv series of maximum permissible concentrations for new toxic
substances in the atmospheric air, and constitute the scientific criteria
for assessing the degree of pollution.  They also form the foundation for
a number of ameliorative sanitation measures for control of atmospheric
pollution in populated areas.

     The material included in this volume deals with the response of the
organism',

     (1)  to lci'7 concentrations of chemical air pollutants around major
petrochemical complexes that are now under intensive development;

     (2)  to low concentrations of air pollutants around chemical plants
manufacturing as raw material for nylon production the salts of adipic acid
and hexamethylenediamine and also salts of sebaic acid and hexamethylene-
diamine; and

     (3)  to the various concentrations of air pollutants around organic
synthesis planes and other facilities of the new chemical industry.

Methods of determination of low concentrations of various substances in the
atmospheric air are also described in some of the papers of this volume.

     Much of the background material presented in the prefaces to the pre-
ceding volumes of this series is also relevant to the present volume.

     Some background information on the distribution of the Soviet industry's
production machine may be of interest in connection with that country's present
and potential pollution problems and investigations.  The planned distribu-
tion of production in the Soviet Union favors effective exploitation of the
natural resources of the USSR, especially in its eastern areas where enormous
                               V

-------
natural resources are concentrated, and has led to the creation of large
industrial centers and complexes of heavy industry in many of the country's
economic areas (see page ix).   The many diverse climatic conditions of the
country and its major economic areas as well as the geographical distribu-
tion of the Soviet Union's principal industrial and mining centers and of
its principal electric power stations and power systems can be seen from
the various maps presented as  background material in this volume.

     Public awareness of the environmental crisis and the pollution problem
has been greatly stimulated in the USSR by the description, in the local
press, of such phenomena as dirty urban air, polluted rivers, ravaged
forests and public parks, and poisoned wildlife as well as by the revealing
of the causes of these conditions.  In the Soviet Union, like in the West,
pollution now poses for the leaders of the country some fundamental choices
between the economics of production, on one hand, and the progressively
worsening living conditions, on the other.  There appears to be, at present,
a greater appreciation and a better understanding of the immense problems
of air and water pollution on  the part of the urban and rural administrative
agencies.  As a result of a mounting demand for the maintenance of a high
quality physical environment,  protective measures against the pollution
threat are gradually taking shape in the USSR and much relevant air pollution
research data are being developed in the various industrial regions of that
country.

     It is hoped that the papers selected for presentation in this volume
will be conducive to a better  appreciation of some of the air pollution
investigations conducted in the USSR.  As the editor of this volume I wish
to thank my co-workers in the  Air Pollution Section of the Institute for
their valuable assistance.
                                   M. Y. Nuttonson
July 1971

-------
ADMINISTRATIVE DWSKWS
         lift

   I.  M.S.FS.R
      Kjrelofmntih S-S.lt.
      Estonun S.S.R-
                 .
      Lithuanian S S R
      Whi't Bir.no  S S R
      Ukrainian & S R.
      Moldavian S S.R.
    .
  10  A/mer.art S.S.R.
  11.  Azwbaydihin S.S.R
  12  KuahhS-SR.
  13.  UA*k &S.R
  14.  TurknMnS.lR.
  15.  T»0zh.k S.S.R.
  16  KirgtzS.S.R.


         A.S.S.R.

   A.  KomiASSR
   a.  iwmumwnASSR
   C  MartysMy* ASSR
   0  Chntshskiy* ASSR
   E  MotthMhayi ASSfl
   r.  TlUrsiuyj ASSR
   G.  8«nl«r«Kay« ASSR
   H." D«K«tansk«yi ASSR
   J.  S«vw(^O»«tmiti«yi AS
   R.  lUbcrdinftkjyi ASSR
   L  AbUwnkaya ASSR
                   yi ASSR
                   « ASSR
   P.  Soryit Mongo1 ***/» ASSR
  Q.  Y*mitsk«yi ASSR

-------
                CLIMATIC ZONES AND REGIONS* OF THE USSR
                                    00  ICO  MO
o  r,oo ,000 .
                         v-?'^?^;-:.^,' --.^rARCTIC
                            --:r ^         -
Zones: I-arctic,  II-subarctic,  Ill-temperate, IV-subtroplcal
Regions:  1-polar,  2-Atlantic,  3-East Siberian, A-Pacific, 5-Atlantic,
6-Siberian,  7-Pacific,  8-Atlantic-arctic, 9-Atlantic-continental  forests,
10-continental  forests  West  Siberian, 11-continental forests East  Siberian,
12-monsoon forests,  13-Pacific  forests, U-Atlantic-continental steppe,
15-continental  steppe West Siberian, 16-mountainous Altay and Sayan,
17-mountainous  Northern Caucasus,,  18-continental desert Central Asian,
19-mountainous  Tyan-Shan, 20-western Transcaucasian, 21-eastern Transcau-
casian, 22-mountainous  Transcaucasian highlands, 23-desert south-Turanian,
24-mountainous  Pamir-Alay
                                 (After B. P. Alisov, "Climate  of The USSR", Moscow 1956)
                 SOIL AND VEGETATION ZONES IN THE U.S.S.R.

           . -...'.-	..-. . y •...•'•, 'f»A" '^-VVvViV v-W^ » >
           •t/r+f:*&*•£::& •^*S$^S&$&.
           9km
                                viii
                           (After A. Lavrishchev, "Economic Geography
                            of the U.S.S.R.", Moscow 1969)

-------
                                MAJOR ECONOMIC  AREAS 0F  THE U.S.S.R.
                                                                 •VI Volga
                                                                 VII Ur.l,
                                                                 VIII We,l Siberian
                                                                 IX Eat) Slbarian
                                                                 X Far Eastern
XI Bailie
XII Soulh-WesUrn
XIII Donals-Dniapar
XIV Southern
XV Tranicaucaiian
XVI Kazakhtlan
XVII Central
XVIII By.loru»!an
ntral Chnrnoiam
Iga-Vyalka
 "  Caucasian
                             PLANNED DISTRIBUTION OF  INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTION  IN  ORDER
                              TO BRING IT CLOSER TO RAW MATERIAL AND  FUEL SOURCES

     An example of the planned distribution  of  industrial  production  in  the USSR  is  the  creation of large
industrial centers and complexes of heavy industry in many of the country's economic areas:  the  North-West
(Kirovsk, Kandalaksha, Vorkuta), the Urals (Magnitogorsk,  Chelyabinsk, Nizhny  Tagil), Western  and Eastern
Siberia (Novosibirsk, Novokuznetsk, Kemerovo, Krasnoyarsk,  Irkutsk, Bratsk), Kazakhstan  (Karaganda, Rudny,
Balkhash, Dzhezkazgan).
     Large'industrial systems are being created - Kustanai, Pavlodar-Ekibastuz, Achinsk-Krasnoyarsk,
Bratsk-Taishet and a number of others.  Ferrous and non-ferrous metallurgy, pulp  and paper,  hydrolysis and
saw-milling industries are being established in the Bratsk-Taishet industrial  system.  The Achinsk-Kras-
noyarsk industrial system is becoming one of the largest centers of aluminum and  chemical industries,  and
production of ferrous metals, cellulose, paper, and oil products.
     Construction of the third metallurgical base has been  launched in Siberia, and  a new base of ferrous
metallurgy, using the enormous local iron and coal resources, has been created in Kazakhstan.  A high-
capacity power system is being organized in the same  areas.  Non-ferrous  metallurgy  is being further
developed in Kazakhstan, Central Asia and in Transbaikal areas.  The  pulp and  paper, as  well as  the timber,
industries are being developed at a fast rate in the  forest areas of  Siberia and  the Far East.
     Ferrous metallurgy is also developing in the European  part of the country by utilizing  the  enormous
iron ore resources of the Kursk Magnetic Anomaly and  the Ukrainian deposits.   Large  new  production systems
are under construction in the North-West, along the Volga,  in the Northern  Caucasus  and  the  Ukraine.

                                                            (After A. Lavrishchev, "Economic Geography
                                                             of the U.S.S.R.",  Moscow 1969)

                                                          ix

-------
THE  MAJOR INDUSTRIAL  CENTERS OF  THE USSR
                Mam centres ol ferrous metallurgy




                  "    "   " non-ferrous metallurgy




              O Centres ol chemical industry
             (After A.  Efimov, "Soviet Industry", Moscow  1968)

-------
                         PTUNfTPAT,  rENTRBS  DP  T?F
                                                          Karaganda
                                                      AAlasu  "
  Complete cycle m«l«llurgy
  Steel tmelling and mel«l
  foiling
  Smelling of ferro«ltoy»
   Mining oft
A iron orei
Q coking eo*I
  nwnganete ore'l
                          I IAIN IRON  ORE DEPOSITS  IN  THE  U.
                                                               (After A. Lavrishchev,  "Economic Geography of
                                                                the U.S.S.R.", Moscow  1969)
                                                      Xi

-------
      PRINCIPAL CENTERS  OF NON-FERROUS  METALLURGY IN THE  U.S.S.R.
                                                Metallurgy:
                                            copper     ® Icoil
                                            (iluininium   ($i nickel

                                          O line       O I'"
DISTRIBUTION OF MOST IMPORTANT  DEPOSITS OF NON-FERROUS I-^ETAL ORES
                                   xii
(After A. Lavrishohev, "Economic Geography
 of the U.S.S.R.", Moscow 1969)

-------
PRINCIPAL  CENTERS OF THE  CHEMICAL INDUSTRY IN THE  U.S.S.R.
                                       O Chemical indu

                                          Oil-relining in

                                       O Production of

                                       O Production
PRINCIPAL  CENTERS OF THE  TEXTILE  INDUSTRY  IN  THE U.S.S.R.
                                                                         urei on (he map thow:
                                                                  I Vyihny   6 Rlhrv     I? Vithug.
                                                                   Volochnk  7 Ot)h«     13 Ibili!,
   Linen cndull.y

©  Woollen induvliy

O  Silk

O  Olhcr br«nch« ol Ihl lnliU induiliy
                                                                  3 f-lov   ? Klinliy    IS NiAK«

                                                                  4 Kalinin   10 Sniolvntk   16 M«*gelan

                                                                  S Ivanovo  11 Bryanik   17Nogin\k
                                 xiii
                                                     (After A. Lavrishchev, "Economic Geography
                                                      of  the U.S.S.R.", Moscow 1969)

-------
PRINCIPAL CENTERS  OF WOOD-WORKING AND PAPER INDUSTRIES  IN THE U.S.S.R.
                                             Industry:
                                          Timber-sawing and wood-working
                                       ©  Paper
                                      O Principal lumbering areas        500    o    JM   tOOOk
                                                                   	'     '     •
      PRINCIPAL CELTTEy'S  OF THE FOOr INDUSTPY IN THE  T7..S.3.P.
                                  40    tt>  60  100 HO  HO   UP
                                                  (After A. Lavrishchev, "Economic Geography
                                                   of the U.S.S.R.", Moscow 19&9)
                                  xiv

-------
THE MAIN MINING CENTERS OF  THE USSR
                                    Oil refining
                                    Oil pipes
                                    Gas pipes
                                    Power italiom
              (After A. Efimov, "Soviet  Industry",  Moscow  1968)

-------
PRINCIPAL  ELECTRIC POWER  STATIONS  AND POWER SYSTEMS  IN  THE  U.S.S.R.
                                                                                                         Principal Electric Power Stations
                                                                                                      Thermal     Hydro-power
                                                                                                        If.         jjt   in operation
                                                                                                        j*j         J*   under construction
                                                                                                                        and planned
                                                                                                                        Groupi ol electric
                                                                                                                        power  stationi
                                                                                                           Operating afomic electric power stations

                                                                                                    Areas ol operation of single power grids

                                                                                                             European  parl of the  U.S.S.R.

                                                                                                             Cenlia! Siberia
                                                                                                   Areas of operation ol integrated power grids

                                                                                                                            Northern Kazakhstan

                                                                                                                            Central Asia.
                                         North-Wesf '
                                         and Weil
                                         Caucasus
                                                                                                                               (Geolermicheskaya)
                                                                                                          omsomoIsk-on-Amur
                                                                                                              '.v.v •.. .-i  TT/^
                                                                                                              -,, . .. I»T •', O->	J-A:P=A-H
Figures indicate following power siations:
       9 Dnieprodzerzhinsk 17 Shatura
      10 Dmeproges      18 EleklrogorslE
      II Kalhovka       I? Ivankovo
                                                    ' Baltic
                                                    2 Narva
                                                    JKegum               aova           vanovo                   ,s »„,
                                                    4 Plavinas           12 Slarobeshevsk    20 The 22nd C.P.S.U. CongreM    "6 Varzob
                                                    5 Novaya Byelorusitc/a 13 Zuyevikaya         HEPS on the Volga           77. Toklogul
                                                    ftDubossary          14 Shterovka       2t The Lenin HEPS on (he Volga   28 Alamedi
                                                    7 Kanev             15 Krasnodar       22 Chardarinskaya                   360      0
                                                    SKremenchug        16 Kashira         23 Chtrchik-Bozsu
                                                                                       (After A. Lavrishchev,  "Economic Geography
                                                                                        of the U.S.S.R.", Moscow 19&9)

-------
           BIOLOGICAL EFFECT OF LOW CARBON DIOXIDE CONCENTRATIONS*
                               0. V. Yeliseyeva
             Fourth Main Administration, Ministry of Public Health of the USSR and
         Communal Hygiene Department, Central Institute for Advanced Training of Physicians

From "Biologicheskoe  deystvie i gigienicheskoe znachenie atmosfernykh
zagryazneniy".   Pod redaktsiey Prof.  V.  A.  Ryazanova i Prof. M. S. Gol'dberga.
Izdatel'stvo "Meditsina"  Moskva, p. 7-27,  (1966).

     Studies conducted  by Pettenkofer have  shown that the amount of  COj  can
be used  to estimate the purity of air in dwellings and  the degree  of their
aeration.  Pettenkofer  proposed a hygienic  norm of tt^  for dwellings of
0.07%, and Flugge, 0.1%.   A 0.1% C02  content in dwellings is still the
hygienic limit  at the present time.  Although this limit has not been phys-
iologically substantiated,  it has played a  positive role in practice and
is still used  for calculating the required  air exchange in closed  spaces,
and serves as  the criterion for evaluating  the purity of room air  and the
operation of ventilating  systems.

     Numerous  studies conducted on animals  and people have shown that an
increase in the  C02 content of inhaled air  does not leave the organism
unaffected and  may cause  substantial  shifts in its condition.  The central
nervous system  is particularly sensitive to excess carbon dioxide.

     Despite the  fact that  there has  been  a considerable number of studies
dealing with the  influence  of C02 on  the various physiological functions
of the organism,  they were  all made by using large concentrations  and are
desultory in character.   Of greatest  interest in this respect are  the
studies of V. P. Zagryadskiy,  Z.  K. Sulimo-Samuylo,  P. F.  Vokhmyaninov
and 0. Yu. Sidorov (1961).   The authors  studied the influence of relatively
low C02 concentrations  on man in short-  and long-term exposure.  The COj
content in the  inhaled  air  ranged from 1 to 2%.   Breathing with the  gas
mixture lasted  from five  hours to ten days.   The authors note that an
increase in the  C02 content causes first of all a change in the activity
of the respiratory and  cardiovascular systems.   When the stay in the
chamber was brief, the  respiration rate  increased or remained unchanged,
and after ten days there  was a tendency  for the respiration rate to  slow
down.  An increase in pulmonary ventilation due to a considerable  deepen-
ing of the respiratory  movements was  noted.   There was also observed a
lasting spasm  of  the peripheral vessels, a  considerable slowing down of
the frequency of  cardiac  contractions, and  an increase of the minimum
pressure by 10~15 mm Hg.  After a prolonged  exposure, changes in the  elec-
trocardiogram were observed, i.e., an increase of the P-Q, QRST intervals,
indicating a certain slowing down of  the conduction functions.
* The physiological studies were directed by Candidate of Medical Sciences A. D. Semenko.
                                  - 1-

-------
     Short-term exposure, to CCL impaired the trace conditioned reflexes
to time, the percentage of erroneous reactions in the study of motor
conditioned reflexes increased, and so did the number of erroneous answers.
The subjects could not sustain an active attention for six minutes and
began to doze off.  A long exposure to carbon dioxide in a concentration
of 1.5-2% was associated with lability of the functions of the motor and
visual systems, impairment of motor coordination, high emotional excita-
bility, restless sleep, irritability, and marked drowsiness in the morning
hours.  There were up-and-down fluctuations of working capacity and a
considerable increase in the number of errors in the course of work.
Changes in the electroencephalogram were very slight.  It is important to
note that the change of the physiological functions of the organism was
observed not only during exposure to atmosphere with a higher CC^ content,
but also during the period of the aftereffect on passing to the conditions
of a normal gaseous medium.  The longer the organism was exposed to con-
ditions of higher C0~ content, the higher was the carbon dioxide concentra-
tion, and the longer was the duration of the aftereffect period.

     In the course of the last few decades, the C0? content of atmospheric
air in large cities has been increasing during the winter months.  Thus,
in Moscow, the mean daily concentration at that time may reach 0.07%, and
the single concentrations are still higher (K. A. Bushtuyeva, V. A. Ryazanov,
Ye. F. Popova, 1956), this being explained by a markedly increased amount
of burned fuel.  Under these conditions, it becomes impossible to maintain
the CC>2 concentration in the air of dwellings at the level of Pettenkofer
and Flugge's norm.  The question arises, to what extent is this norm valid
under changing living conditions?  Actually, Pettenkofer's suggestion was
based on the idea of using carbon dioxide as an indirect index for the
pollution of air of residential and public buildings by volatile products
of human metabolism contained in exhaled air, respiration, and malodorous
gases from body surface and clothing.  In a modern city, where CO 9 is gen-
erated chiefly by the combustion of fuel, it loses the meaning of an in-
direct sanitary index.  For this reason, the observance of this norm for
the air of residential and public buildings is not justified.

     To insist on the observance of this norm is to require a decrease in
the concentration of carbon dioxide in the surrounding atmosphere, which
would involve extremely costly measures aimed at decreasing the discharge
of CC>2.   This could be done only if carbon dioxide as such were proven to
have undesirable hygienic effects on man in concentrations such as 0.1%.
However, as we have seen above, data on the physiological action of ($2
concentrations below 1% are lacking in the literature.

     For these reasons, we undertook a study of the influence of CC^ in
concentrations of 0.5% and below on the respiratory function, the cardio-
vascular system, and the electrical activity of the human cortex.  The
methods of pneumography, rheovasography and electroencephalography were
used for this purpose.
                                   - 2 -

-------
     Our studies were conducted on healthy persons 19 to 45 years of age.
A constant, predetermined CO 2 concentration was maintained during the
entire investigation.

     The source of gas was a cylinder of liquid carbon dioxide at a pres-
sure of 36-46 atm, from which carbon dioxide flowed through a reducing
valve, a float-type flowmeter, and a capillary rheometer into a mixing
tank.  Pure air was also fed into the latter at a constant rate of 20 1/min.
The gas mixture was then fed into a cylinder whose contents the subject
breathed.

     The lines carrying the air consisted of glass and Duralumin tubes.
The air supply was purified with silica gel, activated carbon, and a
cotton filter.

     The actual concentrations of carbon dioxide in the cylinder were
determined by a spectrophotometric method that we developed (M. D. Manita,
0. V. Yeliseyeva, T. V. Dyshko, 1964), both before and after the experiment.

     The apparatus that we used insured an adequate constancy of the con-
centrations.  During the entire observations, the subject remained in an
electrically and acoustically insulated room, sitting in a comfortable
position in a soft chair.   A cylinder continuously supplied with pure air
or with air of a known carbon dioxide concentration was placed at the
height of his face.  The apparatus for dispensing the gas fnr for record-
ing the functions studied and the experimenter were located in an adjoin-
ing room.

     The examinations were conducted with a background of rhythmic photic
stimulations of varying frequency, duration and intensity, generated by a
photostimulator built by the Kaiser Co.   The lamp was placed before the
subject's eyes at an optimum distance determined for each person individ-
ually.   This distance was  kept constant  during the period of all the
experiments.  The intensity of the rhythmic photic stimulation was changed
every five seconds from 0.1 to 0.6 Joule.  The entire series of stimulations
lasted 40 sec in the following sequence  (eight 5-second stimulations in
Joules):   0.2, 0.6, 0.2, 0.1, 0.2, 0.6,  0.2, 0.1.  The subject sat quitely
in the room and signaled the change in light intensity by slightly depress-
ing a button.   This movement was recorded on a myogram.   The method made
it possible to control and maintain the  subject's wakefulness, otherwise
they-usually sank into a drowsy state toward the end of the experiment.
The conditions were identical in all the tests.  The main tests were con-
ducted after repeated training.  After the subjects had become accustomed
to the experimental situation, we recorded the curves during inhalation of
pure air.  This served as  the background against which the influence of
corresponding carbon dioxide concentrations was studied.  Because we studied
low concentrations (from 0.1 to 0.5%), the pure air was regularly checked
                                   - 3 -

-------
for its  carbon  dioxide  content.   The  CCU  concentration did not exceed 0.05%
and amounted  to an  average  of  0.04%.   During the entire experiment we alter-
nated  the  recordings  of the inhalation of different concentrations of CO 2
and pure air.

     Numerous investigations,  particularly those of Holden and co-workers,
established that  the  physiological action of carbon dioxide depends on the
partial  pressure  of  this  gas.   A 0.23% increase of its content in alveolar
air when the body is  at rest leads to a 100% increase in the ventilation
volume.  A 0.01%  decrease or increase of  COo content in alveolar air causes
a corresponding 5%  average  decrease or increase of the ventilation volume
(Holden  and Priestley^  1937).   Thus there is a very significant dependence
of the change of  pulmonary  ventilation on the (X^ pressure in alveolar air.
An increase in  pulmonary  ventilation  is a compensatory reaction of the
organism designed to  decrease  the carbon  dioxide content of alveolar air
when it  increases in  the  inhaled air.

     Ye. M. Berkovich (1939) has shown that the inhalation of €62 starting
at a concentration  of 1%  increases the respiratory capacity, extends the
duration of both breathing  phases, and slightly decreases the respiration
rate.

     In  the light of  modern physiological-concepts (Heymans and Cordier',*
1940; M. V. Sergiyevskiy, 1950,  1961; M.  Ye. Marshak, 1961, and others),
carbon dioxide  alters normal breathing by acting not on the breathing
center directly, but  primarily on the vascular receptor zones and the cor-
tex of the cerebral hemispheres.   Of  particularly great importance in the
stimulation of  breathing, along  with  the  receptors of the lungs, are the
chemoreceptors  located  at the  point of branching of the common carotid.
As the C0~ content  increases,  stimulation of the chemoreceptors of the
aortal-carotid  zone  takes place  in the blood.   By reflex action, this
causes a deepening  and  a  certain acceleration of breathing.

     In addition, it  has  been  shown (Holden and Priestley, 1937) that the
nerve cells of  the  respiratory center can be stimulated by carbon dioxide
present in the  tissue fluid bathing them, into which it penetrates from
the blood.  Thus, carbon  dioxide acts reflexly on the respiratory center
by stimulating  the  chemoreceptors, and also automatically through the
blood.

     •To study the influence of C0~ on the function of external respiration,
we selected seven persons aged 19 to  45,  nonsmokers, without a change in
the nasopharynx or  upper  respiratory  tract.   The respiratory movements were
recorded by using the method of  pneumography with a cuff attached to the
frontal surface of  the  chest.

     The duration of  a  single  examination of different persons varied from
20 to 24 minutes.  During the  first five  minutes the subject breathed pure

*  [Translator's note:  Kholden and Pristli, according to the transliteration of Russian reference.]
** r   "      "    Geymans and Kord'ye, according to the transliteration of Russian reference.-]


                                    - 4 -

-------
 air,  then,  without  his noticing it (by turning a three-way stopcock)  a
 mixture with  a given (XU concentration was supplied to the cylinder,  which
 he  also breathed for five minutes.  Pure air was then fed into the  cylinder
 again.  The instant of start and finish of the gas supply was marked  on
 the  tape by means of an electric marker connected to a switch.

      The data obtained were treated according to the rules of variation
 statistics  with calculation of the confidence factor.  Changes with a
 confidence  factor of no less than 95% were considered statistically
 significant.

      The treatment  was used in two periods:   the first two recordings
 during inhalation of pure air for five minutes were taken as the  "back-
 ground", and  the next three recordings during inhalation of a given CC>2
 concentration for five minutes as the "effect".  The period of the
 "aftereffect" during inhalation of pure air was divided into the  "close
 aftereffect"  (3 recordings) and "distant aftereffect".  In each curve,
 the depth and frequency of respiration were  calculated.  Results  of the
 determinations  were expressed in percent.   The average level of the first
 two  ("background")  determinations were taken as 100%.

      The action of  each concentration studied on the respiration was
 repeated two  to three times on the same subject.

      Two C02  concentrations were studied,  0.5 and 0.1%.  The 0.5% concen-
 tration was found to be active for all seven subjects.  In all of them,
 a decrease  in the amplitude of the respiratory movements was noted.   How-
 ever, in different  persons the statistically reliable changes were not
 the same and  were manifested in different  periods:   in subjects S. and Ch.
 the changes took place during the "effect" period and were preserved  dur-
 ing the "aftereffect" period.   The same results during the "aftereffect"
 period were obtained in subjects 0.,  R., Z.  and M.   In subject A, changes
were  observed only  during the  "aftereffect"  period (Table 1).
                                                    Table 1
                Changes in the Amplitude of Respiratory Movements (in $) During
                        Inhalation of CC>2 in  0.5$ Concentration

Subject
S.
0.
R.
Z.
A.
M.
Ch.
Periods of Observation
Background
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Exposure
91,6 (;i)
87,0
92,5
94, -1
89,0
98.2
77,1 (b)
Aftereffect
Close 1 Distant
88,3
58.9 (b)
7-1,35 (a)
74,8 (a)
8-!, 5 (a)
83,1 (a)
60,6 (c)
70,1 (c)
74,7 (c)
72/5 (c)
71,1 (c)
99,'J
—
                 Note.  Confidence factor: a - 95$; b - 99$; c - 99.9$

-------
      At  a  C02  concentration of 0.1%, statistically reliable changes
 (also in the decreasing direction) in respiration amplitude were  obtained
 in five  out of six subjects (Table 2).

      As  an illustration,  we shall cite the dynamics of changes in the
 respiration amplitude  in  percent for subject 0. during inhalation of
 different  COo  concentrations (Fig. 1).

                                                Table 2

               Changes in the Amplitude of Respiratory Movements (in percent)
                     During Inhalation of C02 in 0.1$ Concentration

Subjects

G.
0.
R. .
Z.
Zh.
M.
Periods of Observations

Background
100
100
100
99,9
99,9
100

Exposure
90,7
88,7
9-1, <1
95,2
79,4 (c)
91,2
Aftereffect
Close
96,3
66,9 (c)
78,8 (a)
90.5
71,6 (b)
80,2(c)
Distant
96,0
75.2 (1.)
78,6 (b)
85,7 (c)
88,6
—
              Note:  a, b, c - see Table 1.
     As far as  the  respiration  rate  is concerned, and also the inspiration-
expiration ratios,  they  did  not undergo any noticeable changes in any of
the subjects.   Thus,  carbon  dioxide  in concentrations of 0.5 and 0.1%
against a background  of  inhalation of  pure air causes changes only in the
depth of breathing.

     The data which we obtained disagre with the literature data to some
extent.  However, such discrepancies in the results are readily explained
by the fact that our  examinations  involved the use of considerably lower
carbon dioxide  concentrations than those used by the authors of the above
studies.

     Both the excitability of the  respiratory center and the sensitivity
of the receptors accepting carbon  dioxide as an adequate stimulus display
substantial differences  in the  effect  of different concentrations.  This
is necessarily  reflected in  the characteristics of external respiration
responses to the action  of carbon  dioxide.

     In order to study the influence of carbon dioxide on the state of the
peripheral circulation in man,  we  made use of the rheovasography method.

     As we know, high frequency curves for studying the fluctuations of
the heart and blood vessels  were first used in 1932 by Atzler and Lehmann.
In the Soviet Union,  the first  investigators to develop a method of study
                                    -  6  -

-------
of blood  circulation  by  means  of high frequency currents were A. A. Kedrov
and A.  I. Naumenko  (1941,  1949,  1954), who validated it theoretically  and
applied it  in  experiments  on animals and in observations on people in  the
study of  intracranial blood circulation.

     The  method  of  rheovasography was used for several years at the Insti-
tute of Therapy  of  the USSR Academy of Medical Sciences in the study of
cardiovascular diseases.   The  rheovasography method consisted essentially
of the  fact  that an electrical current of high frequency encounters a
certain resistance  on passing  through a portion of live tissue.  The mag-
nitude  of this resistance  is affected by the degree of blood filling and
the rate  of  blood flow in  the  given portion of tissue (A. A. Kedrov and
A. I. Naumenko,  1949).   The more the blood circulation rate changes per
unit time (positive and  negative acceleration of the blood flow), the
wider the range  over  which the resistance of the portion of live tissue
to the  electric  current  changes.  After a cardiac systole, the rate of
                  :>>
                  t,
                  o
wo-
so-
.10-
 70-

 60
 SO
                 •a
                 3
                 4->
                  a.
                  a
                         \
                                               /
                                          \J
                                  /  W  12  II  If  II
                             Periods of experiment
                       Fig. 1. Change in the amplitude of
                       respiratory movements in subject 0.
                       during inhalation of different C02 con-
                       centrations.
                       1 - pure air; 2 - 0.1%; J> - 0.5$;
                       AB - period of gas supply.
blood flow always  increases  (positive,  pulse  acceleration) during a
certain period of  time.   The rate  then  slows  down.   After a certain time
interval following the systole, under  the influence of the elastic
force of the vessels, a new  increase of the  rate  of blood flow takes
place (positive vascular  acceleration).  The  rate then slows down again
and reaches the level it  had before  the start of  the systole.  The blood
filling also changes correspondingly.   Such  changes in any portion of
live tissue arise  regularly  during the  period of  each cardiac cycle and
are recorded by means of  rheovasography.   This method is marked by a high
sensitivity.  In serious  disorders  of  the peripheral blood circulation,
the data of rheovasography always  reflect the existing hemodynamic dis-
turbances in a more differentiated manner (V.  A.  Karelin, 1957).  The same
                                    -  7 -

-------
 complexes are repeated on a rheovasogram.   Each  complex consists  of  one
 large and two small spikes.   The large  spike  has  a steep  rising edge
 and a gentler descending edge.   It is  generally  recognized  (V.  A.  Karelin,
 1957; A.  S.  Loginov and Yu.  T.  Pushkar',  1962) that the large  spike  is  a
 reflection of the systolic acceleration of the blood flow.   In time, it
 almost coincides with the ventricular  complex of  the electrocardiogram.
 The small spikes appear after the systole  in  time and may correspond to
 an acceleration of the blood flow as a  result of  the elastic force of
 the vessels  (positive vascular  acceleration).

      Our studies were made by means of  an  RG1-0.1 type rheograph  whose
 output was connected to the recorder of a  Kaiser  8-channel  electroen-
 cephalograph.   Seven people aged 18 to  45  were selected for the experiment.
 The rheovasogram was recorded from the  right  arm, the electrode being
 placed on the skin of the shoulder and  forearm.   The recording was made
 in the morning hours, always at the same  time.

      Each experiment lasted 20-24 minutes.  The  rheovasogram was  recorded
 10-12 times  every two minutes.   The first  two recordings  were  made during
 inhalation of pure air and were taken  as  the  background;  the next three
 recordings,  during the period of exposure,  which  lasted five minutes; and
 the remaining recordings, during the period of the aftereffect, when the
 subject breathed pure air again.   During treatment of the data, the  after-
 effect was divided into two periods: three  recordings pertained to the
 "close aftereffect", and the remaining  ones,  to  the period  of  the "distant
 aftereffect".

      To analyze the rheovasography data, we measured the  sizes  of the
 rising and falling edges of the large spike and second spike.   The results
 of the determinations were expressed in percent  of the average  of the
 first two "background" determinations.

      Data from the study of the influence  of  0.5% carbon  dioxide  on  the
 rheovasographic indices are listed in Table 3.

      The  data of Table 3 show that carbon  dioxide in 0.5% concentration
 caused distinct and significant changes in  blood  filling  of the vessels
 in all seven subjects.   The index of the influence of carbon dioxide was
 an increase  in the size of the  rising and  falling edges of  the  large
 spike and also of the second spike.  Only  subject S.  responded  to carbon
 dioxide inhalation with a decrease in the  size of the descending  edge of
.the large spike of the rheovasogram.

      In the  majority of subjects,  the action  of  carbon dioxide  manifested
 itself already during the period of exposure.  Changes in the  rheovasogram
 were stable  in character and were  preserved during the entire  period of
                                    - 8 -

-------
 the aftereffect.
                                                    Table 3

                   Changes of Complexes (in $) of the Rheovasogram Under the
                     Influence of Carbon Dioxide in 0.5$ Concentration.
Sub-
ject
R.


Z.


O-i


•A.,


•o.

.B.

C.

Complexes of
Rheovasogram .
Rising edge
Descending edge
Second spike
Rising edge
Bescending edge
Second spike
Rising edge
Descending edge
'Second spike
Rising edge
Descending edge
Second spike
Rising edge
•Descending edge
Second spike
Rising edge
Descending edge
Second spike
Rising edge
Descending edge
Second spike
Periods of Observations
Back-
ground
100,0
-100,0
100,2
99,9
100,0
99,9
100,3
100,0
100,1
99,9
99,9
100,0
99,6
100,0
100.0
100,0
100,0
100,2
100,0
100,0
100.0
Exposure
117,9(b)
113,3(a)
138,3
102,']
95.8
100,2
114,7
102,4
103,7
98,3
104,3
9G,2(c)
120,6(c)
117,2(a)
133",8(a)
112,6(a)
109,4 (a)
100,0
110,9
93,S(a)
98,9
Aftereffect
Close
131, l(c)
I20,4(b)
179,0(a)
112.8(b)
104,1 (a)
112,2
142, 3(c)
111, 5(c)
133, 6 (a)
109,8
105,5
M4,7(a)
123,3(c)
12l,5(c)
I34.8(a)
126, 0(b)
119.7(1))
129,1
H3,9(c)
80,0(c)
10S.9
Distant
135, 0(c)
116,2(a)
203, 2(c)
119,5(a)
109,5
111,2
151, 5(c)
120, l(c)
158, 5(c)
98,5
100,7
99,4
I24,5(c)
118, 4(b)
129, 7(a)
125,8(c)
126. 2(b)
109.1 (a)
112,l(c)
75.4(c)
103,8
                    Note:  a, b, c - see Table 1.
     Similar but less distinct results were  obtained in a study  of carbon
dioxide  in  0.1% concentration.   The changes  were  statistically reliable
in 5 out  of 7 subjects  (Table  4).

     As  is  evident from Table  A,  the inhalation of carbon dioxide  in
0.1% concentration caused  an increase of all three indices of the  rheovas-
ogram.   These data show beyond any doubt that even a carbon dioxide
concentration as low as 0.1% is capable of affecting the state of  the

-------
blood  flow  in healthy people.   Fig.  2 shows  graphs  of  the  changes  in  the

size of rheovasogram complexes  for  subject 0.


                                                          Table 4


                          Changes in Rheovasogram Complexes (in percent)

                    Under the  Influence of Carbon Dioxide in 0.1% Concentration.
Subject
R.


. Zh.


2.


'0.


A.


Rheovasogram Complexes
Rising edge
Falling edge
•Seconfl spike
Rising edge
Falling edge
Second spike
Rising edge
Falling edge
Second spike
Rising edge
Falling edge
Second spike'
Rising edge
Falling edge
Second spike
Periods of Observations
Back-
ground
100,0
100,0
100,0
98,5
100,0
100,0
100,0
100,0
100,5
100,0
100,0
100,0
99,9
97,0
99,9
Exposure
10-1,8
104,9(b)
103,0
11-1,3'
109,0(a)
115.8
99,6
102,0
95, -1
109,6
103,3(a)
98,7
„ 107,6
101,1
131, -1
Aftereffect
Close
111, 7(a)
lll,l(n)
115.3
127,5(c)
110,5(b)
137, l(c)
96,5
97,9
75,5(c)
108,3
101.0
84,0
109,3
103,1
117,5(a)
Distant"
115, 7(c)
114, 7(b)
126,8(c)
120,2(c)
106. l(b)
132,3(c)
95,3
97,7
79,3(b)
120,5(a)
108,2(c)
76,0
96,4
89,8
123,3
                     Note:  a, b,  c - see Table 1.
                         ittS-
U>

2,
o
HI
c
                       v 100
                       "O
                       o.
                       a
                         so-

                                                           r\
                                                         i
                                                         i
                               f   o   e   s   to   i!   iii  if  is

                                    Periods of experiment

                         Fig,  2.. Change in. rheovasogram  complexes (rising edge)

                         during inhalation of different 0)3 concentrations in
                         subject 0.  (Reliability of changes 95$).

                                 Notation same as in Fig. 1.
                                           -  10 -

-------
     The responses of the electrical activity of the brain to the inhal-
ation of increased carbon dioxide concentrations were studied by Bremer
and Thomas  (1936), S. I. Subbotnik and P. I. Shpil'berg (1946), and
others.  They established that the inhalation of increased carbon dioxide
concentrations leads to the development of the desynchronization response.
I. S. Repin (1960) observed desynchronization in rabbits in all parts of
the central nervous system during their inhalation of up to 5% CC^.
Similar data were obtained by Yu. N. Ivanov (1962).

     The effect of carbon dioxide concentration below 1% was not studied.

     In recent years, practical sanitary investigations have made increas-
ingly broader use of methods based on the recording of changes in the
electrical activity of the brain under the influence of low concentrations
of noxious substances.  These methods have found wide applications in the
studies performed in the Department of Communal-Hygiene of the Central
Institute for Advanced Training of Physicians.

     We undertook the task of following the changes in the electrical
activity of the human brain during inhalation of carbon dioxide in con-
centrations below 1%.

     Three electroencephalographic methods were used for this purpose:
method of development of the electrocortical conditioned reflex, method
of rhythm assimilation, and method of reinforcement of the intrinsic
potentials of the brain.

     The experimental conditions were identical in all the tests.

     The tests were made on an 8-channel encephalograph with a Kaiser
photostimulator.   The electroencephalograms were taken by the unipolar
method (in combination with the bipolar method) off the occipital,
parietal, and temporal areas of the head.

     At the same time, the time mark, frequency and intensity of rhythmic
photic stimulations and the time of the gas supply were recorded.

     The recording of biocurrents was made on the same channels with the
same degree of sensitivity, and the electrodes were placed on the same
areas.  The subjects were asked to participate in the experiment only
during the morning hours.

     For each subject, training recordings of electroencephalographic
curves were first made for one month.  Afterward, the curves were recorded
during inhalation of pure air, then with a given carbon dioxide concentra-
tion.
                                    - 11 -

-------
     The method of development of the electrocortical conditioned reflex
was first used in hygienic studies by K. A. Bushtuyeva, Ye. F. Polezhayev
and A. D. Semenenko (1960).  This method makes it possible to reveal fine
functional changes in the cerebral cortex arising under the influence of
various external factors.  We studied the development of the electrocorti-
cal conditioned reflex in five healthy persons with a well-defined a rhythm.
The inhalation of the gas lasted 15 seconds, and during the next five
seconds was reinforced with intermittent light.  The conditioned reflex
changes in electroencephalography with reinforcement with rhythmic light
have been described by R. A. Pavlygina and V. S. Rusinov (1960) and also
by Pavlygina (1960).  In order to exclude the development of the conditioned
reflex to time, each new pairing of the action of the gas and light was
given at different time intervals.

     We expected that in the case of formation of a temporal relationship
to the inhalation of definite carbon dioxide concentrations, the imposed
rhythm should appear before the rhythmic light was turned on.

     However, the 0.5% carbon dioxide concentration did not cause the
formation of an electrocortical conditioned reflex in any of the 5 subjects.
The number of pairings reached 23-25.  Concentrations of 2-2.5% also failed
to cause the appearance of an imposable rhythm before the light was turned
on.

     The second electroencephalographic method used for the determination
of thresholds of the reflex action of carbon dioxide - rhythm assimilation -
was proposed by A. G.  Kopylov (1956).

     The method as modified by us has been described by A.  D. Semenenko
(1963) and was used in studies conducted at the communal hygiene department
of the Central Institute for the Advanced Training of Physicians by
V. I.  Filatova (1962), B. Mukhitov (1962), N. B. Imasheva (1963), V.  A. Chizh-
ikov (1963), and P.  G. Tkachev (1963).

     Two subjects with a well-defined a rhythm and a satisfactory assimilation
of the rhythm in the range of usual frequencies were selected for the experi-
ments.  For each, a frequency of flickering light was chosen which differed
(was greater or smaller) from "his" a rhythm.  An optimum distance for each
subject was then established between the subject and the photostimulator
lamp;  the maximum total amplitude of rhythm assimilation for a large inten-
sity of flashes (0.6 Joule) and the minimum amplitude for the lower intensity
of flashes (0.1 Joule) were then observed at this distance.  The frequency
of the Flickering light and the distance of the lamp were kept unchanged
during all the experiments.  The entire series of light stimulations lasted
40 seconds.   The intensity of the rhythmic photic stimulus  was changed every
5 seconds from 0.1 to 0.6 Joule.
                                      - 12 -

-------
     The recording of the assimilation curves was repeated every 2 minutes
for 20 minutes.  The subjects breathed pure air during this entire period.

     In studies with gas, the first two recordings of the curves were made
during inhalation of pure air, the next three recordings during the period
of inhalation of the gas, and the following ones, 5 seconds after cessation
of the supply of carbon dioxide, then every 2 minutes until the reestablish-
ment of the initial level of the assimilated rhythm or the appearance of a
tendency toward its reestablishment.

     The electroencephalograms obtained were analyzed from the change in
the amplitude of 'the assimilated rhythm, expressed in microvolts.  To cal-
culate the amplitude, oscillations exactly correspodning to the frequency
of the applied light pulses were recorded first, then the amplitude of the
recorded assimilated rhythm was measured in millimeters for each intensity
separately and the total amplitude was measured for every 40 seconds of
rhythmic photic stimulations.  The total amplitude of the assimilated
rhythm based on all the intensities for the entire period of the experiment
was calculated in percent of the average total amplitude obtained from
the results of the first two curves of rhythm assimilation recorded in
the second and fourth minutes of the examination, and taken as 100%.  The
results of the examinations are given in Fig. 3 and 4.

     A carbon dioxide concentration of 0.5% was found to be the active
concentration for both subjects.

     In subject R. T., there was noted a well-defined tendency toward an
increase in the amplitude of the assimilated rhythm, although statistically
reliable changes appeared only during the period of the aftereffect (the
reliability of the changes was 99%).

     Somewhat different results were obtained in subject I. A., in whom
the action of the gas was manifested in the second minute of inhalation
(reliability of changes 95%) and was also characterized by an increase in
the total amplitude of the assimilated rhythm.  When using the third method
of study of the electrical activity of the brain, we employed the frequency
of the rhythmic light stimulus corresponding to the frequency of the intrin-
sic potentials of the subjects' brain.  The calculation of the total ampli-
tude of the reinforced rhythm was made by means of a special electronic
device, an integrator built by engineer B. N. Balashov.

     The study of the reinforcement of potentials of the intrinsic rhythm
during inhalation of low carbon dioxide concentration was made on seven
practically healthy people aged 19-45.  The experimental conditions and
the treatment of the results were analogous to the ones described above.
                                    - 1-3 -

-------
tso-
170-

a ISO-
1>»
t -ISO-
•o
CO
• H
H ^"
t/1
10 //#-
o
«, 110-
•o
| wo-
o.
B













*** 	
• -• — '


%






i
I
. I
j
/••*
,'
"X'V,^




/ \
/ \
r \>
i \
» \
i \
1 \







"^ — . — '—


•* ~ i i 	 1 	 r 	 1 	 1 	 1 	 1 	 1 	 1 —
2 
-------
      The total amplitude was  expressed in percent of the  three  initial
 changes taken as the background.   Statistical treatment of  the  results
 was  carried out in comparison with data for inhalation of pure  air in the
 following periods of observations:  "background", "exposure",  "close after-
 effect" and "distant aftereffect"  (Table 5).


                                                     Table 5
                 Changes in the Amplitude  of Reinforced Rhythm (in percent)
             Under the Influence of Inhalation of the Carbon Dioxide Concentrations Studied
Sub-
ject
UK.


V.


0.

A.

,
H.


N.


E. •


C02 concentra-
tions studied
Mcncc 0,05
0,1 - '
0,5
Mcncc 0,05
0,1
0,5
Aicncc 0,05
0,5
Mcncc 0,05
0,1
0.5
Aicncc 0,05
0,1
0,5
Mcncc 0,05
0,1
0,5
Mcncc 0,05
0,1
0,5
Periods of Observations
Back-
ground
101,4
98,8
102,7
99,1
100,0
98,5
99,2
99,4
102,3
100,0
101,3
99,1
100,0
93,0
102.5
100,1
101,0
100,5
99,2
100,0
Exposune.
102,4 '-.
96,2
95,0
99,3
104,9 (b)
89, 6 (b)
100,7 ..
96,5
105,1
104,0
97 ,-7
96,9
108,2 -
83,2 (b)
101.9
108,3
94 , 7
100,1
103,7
92,6 (b)
Aftereffect
Close
95,9
97.7
87,7
101,5
105,6
91,5 (c)
104,1
103,3
102,5
107,7
99,5
91.6
106.6
74,5 (b)
107,9
116,0
93,5 (a)
102,1
106,4
89,r(c)
Distant
100,8
92,0 (a)
89, 7 (a)
101,3
110,0
•96,8 (a)
109,0
103,9
104,4
108,7
' 97,3
94.3
124,5 (a)
79,5 (b)
102,9
103,4
82.9 (c)
99.0 '
106,9 (a)
87,8
                Notft:  o, b, c - see Table 1.


     From Table  5  it  is  apparent that carbon  dioxide in 0.5% concentration
affected five  of the  seven subjects tested.   This  effect consisted in  a
decrease of the  amplitude of  reinforced rhythm  (Fig. 5).  The 0.1% concen-
tration caused an  increase in the amplitude of  decreased rhythm in four
out of seven subjects  (in 3 during the period of "distant aftereffect" and
in 1 during the  period  of exposure).

     Thus, it  may  be  concluded that carbon dioxide  in 0.5 and 0.1% concen-
trations is capable of  influencing the functional  state of the cerebral
cortex.
                                      - 15 -

-------
•o
§
o
                 J=
                <«+>
                o>.
                 s.
                0) fc.
                •O
                3
 %


•no -



:SO-



 70-
                                       a


^b=^—
/'

.*s
s
^^~ 	
\

xx' •
/'** \ '^ ^
2 in 0.5% concentration.


      3.   The data  obtained strongly suggest  that single C02 concentrations
in the air'of residential and public buildings should not exceed 0.1%,  and
average  daily concentrations 0.05%, independent of the source of C09.
                                       -  16

-------
                        LITERATURE  CITED

 BcpKOiiii-i  1Z. M.-  ii3iio.n.  wypn.  CCCP.   1939,   T. XXVI. n. 4.
   CT|). 408—419.
 I) y in T y c n a K. A., II o .'i c x< a c u  E.  ., C c M c n c n i< o A A. fur-
   ii can.  1960, A? I, CTp.  57—61.
 FcfiM.iiic  K.  n   KopAbc A.  13 KII.: Ai.ixnTC.nbiii.ifi ucmp M.—J\.,
   1940.  170  CTp.
 Hnaiiou 10. II.   ii3iio;i.   wypn.   CCCP.    1962,   T. 48  A° 3
   CTj). 279—289.
 H M .1 in c D a  II. B. Hir.  n can. 1963, Ar° 2,  crp.  3—8.
 KapeJMiii  B.  A.  Xiipypnia. 1957, A1?  I, erp. 34—37.
 KcApon A. A. IVIMII.  MCA. 1941,  T. 19, Ar° 1,  crp.  71—80.
 KcApou A. A. »  HayneiiKo  A. M. ixaniui y 'ic^oi>ci;a.  M.,  1961, 251  CTJI.
 M a I> uu a K  M.  E.  MaTCpiiaflu o  (JiyMKHiioiin.ni.nofi opraiiii3annn Abixa-
   TC^i.noro uciiTpa. B  KII.: Honoc n  (|)ii3iiojionni u   naTO^onui
   niifi.  HOA pCA. B. B. napima.  M., 1961, crp.  140—141.
 MyxiiTOB  D. M. Fur.  n can. 1962, Ar2 6; CTp.  16—24.
 D a n n u v n u a  P.  A. 3/iciopMai;nii CT»o^a   MOSIM
   iipn co'iCTaiiiiii auyi;a  c PIITMHMCCKHM CIICTOM. B  KII.:  3i;cncpiiMCii-
   Ta.ni,HOC iisyiciuic aaKoiiOMCpnocTcfi Kopw  Co.ibujiix no^yuiapnfl.  M.,
   1950,  cTp.  39-48.
 IT a n .n 1.1 r n n a   P. A. n P y c 11 n o n  B. C.    YcjionnopctpJicKTOpiian
   nepccrpofiKa KopKODofi  PIITMIIKII y  'ic^oncKa iipn co'iCTaiiiiii siiyKa c
   pnrMii'iccKUM  cncTOM.  B KII.: 3KcnepiiMCiiTa;ibiioc  myicniic 3aii;iiuOTiii.ix.  /McAi'ii.i,  1950,  362  crp.
 C c p r H c n c K n ii  AV  B.  Ilonuc Aainn.ic o pcry^nunn Awxannn. B  KM.:
   Ilonoc  n (|)ii3iio.noriin u iiaro-nonm  Auxainm.  PloA  pcA.  B.  13.  I'lapn-
   iia. A\.. 1961,  CTp. 188-190.
 C y 6 0 o T n n K  C. H.,  I.IJ n n /i i> C c p r  n. H.  3.ncKTpo3iiuc(l>a;iorpa-
   (Jiii'jcc.Kiic ncc;ic;ionai!ii)i D.niiiiiinsi Ko.nc6aiiiiii  yponnn  caxapa,  KIIC/IO-
   POAH  ii yr.nci n .T a TO n a  B. M.  Tiir. n can.  1962,  A»  II, CTp. 3—8.
 XO^ACII  Ji. >i;. C. n ripiicT.Tii AM;. P.  B KM.: Awxamie. BIIOMC.V
   riis.  1937,  441  crp.
 MioioiKon  B. A. Tur.  n can.  1963, As 6,  CT|).  8—15.
 A (7. Icr II.  u.  Lchmann C.. Arbcitsphysiologic. 1932,  Bd. 5, H. 6,
 '  S. 636—681.
 B r e in c r P., Thomas  I.  Action  dc 1'anoxcmic,  dc   1'hypcrcapnic
   ct dc  I'acapnic  sur I'activilc clcctriquc  du cortex  cerebral.  Sociclc
   de Biologic, 1936. CXXI1I, N  36. p.  1256-1261.
                                   -  17  -

-------
             HYGIENIC EVALUATION OF POLLUTION OF  THE  ATMOSPHERE

                         WITH HEXAMETHYLENEDIAMINE


                               A. Ye. Kulakov
                  Institute of General and Communal Hygiene  im. A. N. Sysio,
                          Academy of Medical Sciences, USSR

From "Biologicheskoe deystvie i gigienicheskoe  znachenie  atmosfernykh
zagryazneniy".  Pod redaktsiey Prof. V. A. Ryazanova  i Prof.  M.  S.  Gol'dberga.
Izdatel'stvo "Meditsina" Moskva, p. 28-41, (1966).

     Hexamethylenediamine was first prepared by V.  Solonin  in 1896.  It  is
used in modern industry chiefly as an intermediate  in the production of  HA
or HS salts (hexamethylenediamine adipate or sebacate) from which  the
polyamide resin nylon, used as the material for a synthetic fiber  of the
same name and for various plastic products, is prepared by  poly condensation.
As an intermediate, hexamethylenediamine is used  in the production  of
poly ure thanes , from which a special rubber and plastics are obtained.  As a
hardener, it finds applications in the production of  epoxy  resins  and
certain pigments.  Hexamethylenediamine is also used  in the production of a
chemical antifoaming agent.  In industry , 'hexamethylenediamine is  obtained
from adipic acid.  According to the data of A. P. Martynova (1957)  and
V. S. Filatova et al. (1958), hexamethylenediamine  is  observed in  substantial
concentrations in the air of plants producing nylon and HA  salts.   Our
attempts to find data on atmospheric pollution with hexamethylenediamine in
the literature have been unsuccessful.
     Hexamethylenediamine, H2N(CH2)gNH2 , is a colorless  crystalline substance
with an unpleasant odor.  The melting point is 42°  (41-39°C.),  and the boil-
ing point, 204-205°C.  It volatilizes readily.  The volatility  at 65°C.  is
22.2 mg/1, and amounts to 1980 mg/1 at  186°C.  Hexamethlenediamine dissolves
very well in water, alcochols, acetone, more sparingly in benzene, and poorly
in ether.  It is a strong organic base  (stronger than ammonia).  From air,
hexamethylenediamine strongly absorbs water and carbon dioxide,  forming  with
the latter a carbonate quite soluble in water.  When stored in  contact with
air, hexamethylenediamine oxidizes and  darkens.  It keeps well  in aqueous
and alcohol solutions.

     'In chemical structure, hexamethylenediamine is similar to  such poisons
as cadaverine and putrescine, which are formed during putrefaction of pro-
teins.  Its toxic effect has been little strudied, and the available data
pertain. chief ly to the action of high concentrations.  The studies of
Hindelbrandt [cited by Curtius, Clemm (1900), Ceresa, Blasiis  (1950)],
V. S. Filatova et al. (1951), and A. P. Martynova (1957) have shown that
hexamethylenediamine has a general resorptive action which is manifested in
                                    - 18 -

-------
 an  impairment  of  the  permeability of fine and medium blood vessels,
 various  dystrophic  and  degenerative changes in internal organs  (lungs,
 liver, kidneys, adrenals, heart muscle, brain, bone marrow, stomach,
 and intestine).   It has a depressing effect on the central nervous system,
 lowers  the  arterial pressure,  and changes the morphological composition
 of  the blood.  The  inhalation  of hexamethylenediamine  causes strong head-
 ache (S.  I.  Vol'fkovich et  al., 1959).  When deposited on the skin even
 in  small concentrations, it  causes dry and wet necroses.  During storage
 in  open  air,  the  toxic  action  of hexamethylenediamine  gradually disappears.
 If  humidity  reaches the carbonate formed with air, the toxic action on
 the skin is  reestablished (V.  S. Filatova et al., 1951).  In low concen-
 trations, hexamethylenediamine has a sensitizing effect on human skin,
 causing  dermatitides  and eczemas (Duvernevil, Buisson, 1952; F. P. Odintsova,
'1961; L.  P.  Tsirkunov,  1963, M. D. Bagnova, 1962).  We observed four cases
 of  such  sensitizing action  on  sensitive persons, three of whom were in con-
 tact with hexamethylenediamine for two to four weeks,  and one for two days.

     Gipstein  (1941), Anderson (1950), Rein, Rogin (1950), Themine (1955),
 Zawahry  (1956), Morris  (1960), and M. I. Leonenko (1962) indicate the
 ability  of  certain nylon products to sensitize susceptible people and cause
 such dermatitides and eczemas.

     However,  Fanburg (1940),  Dobkevitch,-Baer (1947), Sibney, Jennes
 (1951),  Calnon, Wilson  (1956), and Janson (1959) do not share this opinion.
 In  their view, dermatitides  and eczemas are not caused by nylon, but by
 the dyes  used  in  the  nylon  products, and properly treated nylon does not
 have any  sensitizing  action.

     Last et  al.  (1950) , Schweisheimer (1948) and others successfully used
 certain  nylon  products  in surgical practice (catheters, suture material)
 and hold  that  nylon products have no toxic effects.  However, Openheimer
 et  al. (1953)  observed a reticulum cell sarcoma around  a nylon film which
 had been  sutured  into rats.

     The basis of the mechanism of the toxic action of hexamethylenediamine
 is  the ability of nono- and  diamines to "free" bound histamine and possibly
 also other biologically active substances (Paton, 1957).  This apparently
 explains  the  similarity of  the toxic action of hexamethylenediamine and
 histamine,  as well  as the ability of the former to exert a sensitizing
 influence on  susceptible people.

     Taking  into  account the industrial importance of hexamethylenediamine
 and the  possibility of  contamination of atmospheric air with this compound,
 we  undertook  a study  of certain aspects of the biological action of hexa-
 methylenediamine, and on this  basis attempted to propose its maximum per-
 missible  concentration  in atmospheric air.
                                     -  19  -

-------
                                                                              .3 C
     We  determined hexamethylenediamine  in  air by means  of  a  colorimetric
method based  on  its  reaction with  dinitrochlorobenzene,  proposed in 1957
by  V. I. Kuznetsov,  Z. M. Pimenova and A. P. Martynova.   The  reaction
forms 1.6-bis-aminohexane, which dissolves  in chloroform and  gives  a
yellow color.  Hexamethylenediamine is absorbed  in  cotton wetted with
distilled water.  Up  to  15 liters  of  air was collected at the rate  of
3 liters per  minute.  The sensitivity of the method was  0.0025  mg per ml
of  solution;  ammonia  does not interfere  when present  in  amounts up  to
5 mg.  This method, suitable for the  determination  of hexamethylenediamine
in  industrial quarters, was modified by  us  under the  supervision of
N.  G. Polezhayev in order to increase its sensitivity.   In  the  new  modifi-
cation,  the air  was passed through  two absorbers with a  porous  plate No.  1,
20-25 mm in diameter.  The absorbing  solution used  was a 0.1  N  solution  of
sulfuric acid (10 ml).   For the analysis, 300 liters  of  air was collected
at  a rate of  1-2 liters per minute.

     The reaction of  hexamethylenediamine with dinitrochlorobenzene took
place in alkaline medium with heating for 30 min. in  a water  bath.   After
cooling, the  compound formed (1.6-bis-aminohexane)  was extracted by agita-
ting in acid  medium with 0.5 ml of  chloroform for 20  minutes.   Using the
intensity of  the yellow  color of chloroform, the sample  was compared with
a standard scale.  The sensitivity of the method was  0.0003 mg  in the sample.
0.5 ml of ammonia gives a yellow coloration corresponding to  0.0003 mg of
hexame thylenediamine.

     In order to establish the threshold of the  reflex effect of  hexamethyl-
enediamine on people, we carried out the determination of the threshold  of
olfactory sensation by using a method recommended by  the  Committee  on Sani-
tary Protection  of Atmospheric Air  (V. A. Ryazanov, K. A. Bushtuyeva,
Yu.  V.  Novikov,  1957).

     The study was made on 19 people whom an otorhinolaryngologist  pronounced
healthy for this type of test.   A total  of 273 determinations of  odor with
concentrations of 0.0110,  0.0074, 0.0041, 0.0032 and 0.0027 mg/m3  were  made.
                                          Table 1

                        Threshold of Olfactory Sensation
                            of Hexamethylenediamine.
Number of
Subjects
5
12
2
Quantity of
OBservations
69
1C9
35
Concentration of
Hexataethylenediamine, rng/b^
Threshold
0,007-1
0.0011 •
0.0032
Subthreshold
0.00 11
0.0032
0.0027
                                     - 20-—

-------
     As  is  evident from Table 1, the  threshold of olfactory sensation
for  the  most  sensitive persons of this  group  was  a concentration of
0.0032 mg/m3.   The concentration of 0.0027  mg/m^  was not perceptible
to any of  the subjects tested.

     As  we  know,  studies made by G. V.  Gershuni et al.  have shown  that
a low intensity factor may give rise  in the organism to responses whose
strength does not reach the capacity  to involve mechanisms causing
conscious  perception, i.e., sensation,  but  which  can be objectively
recorded by means of highly sensitive methods of  investigation.  One
such method,  which we used, consists  in studying  the light sensitivity
of the eye  in the course of dark adaptation during simultaneous inhalation
of low concentrations of chemical substances.   This method has been vali-
dated by the  studies of several authors.  The light sensitivity was deter-
mined by means of an ADM adaptometer  in three persons ranging in age from
21 to 26 years and having a smell threshold of 0.0041 mg/m3.

     In  subject S.  (Table 2, Fig. 1), concentrations of 0.0041 and 0.0032
mg/m^ caused  a marked depression of the light sensitivity of the eye over
the entire  course of the experiment after the gas mixture was supplied.
The 0.0027  mg/m^  concentration caused a much  slighter depression, statis-
tically  reliable  only in the 20th minute.   The 0.0017 mg/m3 concentration
was found  to  be inactive:  the curve  representing the change of the light
sensitivity of the eye almost coincided with  the  curve  obtained during
inhalation  of pure air.
                                                    Table 2

              Change in the Light Sensitivity of the Eye in the Course of Dark
               Adaptation During Inhalation of Different Hexamethy-lenediamina
                                Concentrations.
                (Average values in percent at 15thjninute of experiment).


Subject

T.



S.



N.



S
'erica of
Experi-
ment,
Minutes
20
25
30
40
20
25
30
-10
20
25
30
40


Pura Air

198
2GI
301
320
119
129
M2
150
17.1
201
212
219
Concentrations, mg/m'

O.OO'H

337(1))
38 1 (a)
442(b)
4-l5(a)
85(c)
99(b)
103(b)
I05(c)
10100
17-1(0)
178(0)
200(0)

0,0032

319(b)
405(0)
-109(0) .
49G(a)
9-l(c)
9G(n)
103(b)
107(c)
168(0)
197(0)
21(0)
2M(0)

0.0027
.
293(.i)
335(0)
359(0)
389(0)
105(n)
11-1(0)
127(0)
M3(0)
—
—
—
• — .•

0.0017

201(0)
277(0)
316(0)
353(0)
119(0) .
•125(0)
13-1(0)
142(0)
—
— .
—
—
               Note.  Confidence factor: a - 95$, b - 99#, c - 99#, 0 - unreliable
                                      -  21  -

-------
                                                       minutes
                  1.  Change of the light sensitivity of the eye in subject
                     T. during inhalation of hexamethylenediatnine.
                     1 - pure air; 2 - concentration' of 0.0017 mg/m5;
                     3 - 0.0027 ng/m?; k - 0.0032 rrg/m3; 5 - O.OOkl ng/m3.
     In subject T.,  on the contrary,  the 0.0041 and 0.0032  mg/m^ concen-
trations  caused a marked reliable  increase of the light sensitivity of
the eye at  the  20th  minute of  the  experiment.  A reliable but slighter
increase  in the light sensitivity  of  the eye at the 20th minute was also
noted at  the 0.0027  mg/m^ concentration.  The 0.0017 mg/m3  concentration
was found to be inactive.

     In the third subject, N. ,  the 0.0041 mg/m^ concentration at the
20th minute caused a reliable  depression -of the light sensitivity of the
eye,- while  the  0.0032 mg/m^  concentration proved inactive.

     Thus,  the  threshold of  the  reflex effect of hexamethylenediamine on
the light sensitivity of the eye  for  the two subjects corresponded to the
0.0027 mg/m^ concentration,  and the subthreshold concentration was 0.0017
                                      - 22  -

-------
     In order to establish the lowest subsensorial threshold of the reflex
effect of hexamethylenediamine,  we also used the method of study of the
electrical activity of the brain.  A modification of this method was used
in the form of reinforcement of  the intrinsic rhythm with a flashing light.
This method was first employed by A. D. Semenenko and B.  N. Balashev in
hygienic studies (1963).

     The subject was placed in a weakly illuminated (1.5  Ix) screened
electroencephalographic chamber.  At a distance of 0.7-2  m from his eyes
was placed the flash lamp of a photostimulator that was turned on for
20 seconds every minute,  the light intensity being changed every 5 seconds.
The flicker frequency of  the light of the flash lamp was  close to the sub-
ject's ot-rhythm frequency.  In the intervals separating the switching on
of the flickering light,  the subject limbered up for 20-25 seconds (move-
ment in the chair), to keep his  general muscle tone, then a sound generator
whose frequency varied from 200  to 2000 Hz was turned on  for 10 seconds.
During the test, the subject closely followed the variation of the intensity
of the light flashes and  sound pitch, which he noted by squeezing a pressure-
sensitive detector held in his hand.  The subject could be seen by means of
a mirror through a window in the chamber.  The examination lasted 13-14
minutes.  During the examination, an electroencephalogram was recorded; for
each lead of the latter,  the integrated energy of the brain potentials was
recorded every 5 seconds  on separate channels by means of a multichannel
integrator of Balashev's  design.  The pulses of the pressure-sensitive
gauge, which the experimenter used to follow the responses of the subject
to changes in the photic  and acoustic stimuli, were recorded on a separate
channel.  An electroencephalogram segment obtained while  the flash lamp
was on was subjected to analysis.  Each subject underwent a preliminary
training.

     The physiological fluctuations over the course of the examination were
insignificant.  The cylinder whose contents were breathed by the subject
was continually supplied  with pure air.  The gas mixture  of known concen-
tration was connected to  pure air at the 4th minute of the test and was cut
off after 6 minutes.  All the switching operations were performed in another
room out of the subject's sight.  Data obtained during inhalation of pure
air and a certain hexamethylenediamine concentration were compared in
relative units and subjected to  variational statistical treatment.  The
examination was made with a 16-channel electroencephalograph of the Galileo
Co.  The recording was made from both hemispheres with uni- and bipolar
leads, and statistical treatment was applied to data obtained with occipito-
temporal leads.  Four subjects having a smell threshold of 0.0041 mg/m3 par-
ticipated in the experiments.  A total of 64 examinations were performed.

     Three hexamethylenediamine  concentrations were studied:  0.0027, 0.0017
and 0.0011 mg/m3.  The 0.0027 mg/m3 concentration caused  a decrease in the
energy of the brain potentials in all four subjects (Table 3 and Figs. 2 and
                                     -. 23 -

-------
3).  In subject  T.  the decrease in the energy of brain  biocurrents was
noted in both  hemispheres,  but the most statistically significant changes
were observed  in the left hemisphere.  In the remaining subjects significant
changes were observed in one hemisphere only.

     The 0.0017  mg/m^ concentration caused a decrease in the energy of
brain potentials in only three subjects, and in subject T.  reliable changes
also occurred  in both hemispheres.  On the whole,  the decrease in the energy
of brain potentials for the 0.0017 mg/m^ concentration  was  less pronounced
than for the 0.0027 mg/m^ concentration.  The 0.0011 mg/m3  concentration
did not cause  significant changes in the electrical activity of the brain
in any of  the  subjects, although in T. and S. there was noted a tendency
toward a decrease in the energy of biocurrents in  the right cerebral hemis-
phere at the 7th-9th minute of the test.  However, this decrease did not
reach a statistically significant value.

     In our investigations, we were able to subject the data obtained from
the two hemispheres to separate statistical treatments.   The experiments
showed that low  hexamethylenediamine concentrations caused  unequal changes
in the electrical activity  in different cerebral hemispheres of one and the
same subject.  The  0.0027 mg/nH concentration caused the largest decrease
in the energy  of potentials in the left cerebral hemisphere, and the 0.0017
mg/m^ concentration, in the right hemisphere.  The unequal  effect of hexa-
methylenediamine on the electrical activity of the cerebral hemisphere was
also observed  in other subjects.
                                                  B •
                  too
                  •
                o
                in '
                a
                   90-
                tu
                •a
                3
                O.
                a
                «<
                   70-
                   -.0
~f~
 9
                                                     10  -U  //minutes
                  Fig. 2.  Change in the electrical activity of the brain in subject
                  T. during inhalation of hexamethylenediamine (right hemisphere).
                  1 - pure air; 2~- concentration, 0.0011 rag/m'; 3 - 0.0017 mg/m';
                          k - 0.0027 mg/m5; AB - period of gas supply.
                                      - 24 -

-------
     The  literature  contains  indications of the presence  of  a temporary
interhemispheric  asymmetry in some healthy persons under  normal conditions
(Ye. A. Zhirmunskaya,  1963).   It is possible that the interhemispheric
asymmetries manifest  themselves more markedly under  the influence  of low-
intensity  factors.

                f/a     .  •
              g  100
                30-
                SO-
                70-
              o.
              a
../
                                              '.?
                                                     //   /minutes'
               Fig. 3.  Change in the electrical activity of the brain in subject
               T. during inhalation of hexamethylenediamine (left hemisphere).
                             Notatioi) same as in Fig. 2.
     Thus, the  threshold of  change in the electrical activity  of  the brain
in the most sensitive  persons during inhalation of hexamethylenediamine
corresponds to  a  concentration level of 0.0071 mg/m^.

     On the basis  of  the data obtained, we recommend as  the highest  single
maximum permissible  concentration of hexamethylenediamine in atmospheric
air a level of  0.001 mg/m^,  which is below the threshold of action according
to the most sensitive  method of investigation (Table 4).

     We studied the  contamination of atmospheric air with hexamethylenediamine
around a plant  producing HA  salt.  In addition to hexamethylenediamine, the
discharges of the  plant  also contained ammonia, which in high  concentrations
interferes with the  determination of hexamethylenediamine, and for this
reason we determined both of these substances simultaneously.   Ammonia was
considered in the  calculation of the hexamethylenediamine concentration.
                                    - 25 -

-------
                                                                                             Table 5
Change in the Energy of Brain Potentials During Inhalation  of Different  Hexamethylenediamine Concentrations
         (Average Values in Percent  Relative  to the'lst,  2nd and  3rd Minutes of the Experiment).


•Subject
T.. '


s.


M." .


R..



Period of
Experiment,
Minutes
4-6
7-9
10—12
4—6
7—9
10—12
4—6
7-9
10—12
4-6 '
7-9
10—12'
Right Hemisphere

Pure Air,
99
96
' 93
• 95
97
95
102
102
100
101 -
99
95 '

0.0027
mg/m^
98(0)
89(o)
' 80(a)
100(0)
9S(o) •
84(o)
102(0)
103(0)
97(o
8S(a)
82(c
80(b)

Pure Air
94
98
85
93
' 106 '
92
105
108
107 •
101
94
93

0.0017
mg/m3
88(0)
84(c)
72(o)
92(o)
S9(a)
84(o)
100(o)
100(0)
95(a)
97(o)
95(o)
94(o)

o.boii
mg/m3
99(o)
9l(o)
90(o)
96(o)
98(o)
95(o)
102(o)
106(o)
10l'(o)
93(o)
. 90(o)
85(o)
Left Hemisphere

Pure Air
104 '
98
95
107
112
107 •
106
114 ;
105 •
' 104 .
' 102
99

0.0027
mg/m3
86(a)
78(a)
76(a)
100(o)
• 93(c)
89(a)
97(a)
100(b)
96(o)
99(o)
95(o)
94(0)

Pure Air
94
99
87
j 98
97
85
103
100
. 104
il04
101-
102

0,00!7
Eg/m^
93(0)
86(a)
76(o)
101(o)
92(o)
86(0)
9S(o)
95(o)
94(o)
106(0)
104(o)
99(o)

0.001]
mg/nP
97(o)
94(o)
90(o)
9S(o)
95(o)
92(o)
98(o)
96(o)
96(o)
102(o)
101(o)
100(o)
    Note.  Confidence factor:   a  - 99£i  b  - 99%,  c - 99%, o - unreliable.

-------
                                                                                   A'
                                               Table k

                           Thresholds of the reflex effect of
                        hexamethylenediamine on the human organism
                                 during inhalation

Threshold
"~ ~
Olfactory sensitivity
Effort on _ the light
sensitivity of the eye
_ Effect on the electrical
activity of the brain
loncentration in rag/i
Minimum
Active
0,0032
0.0027

0,0017

Maximum
Inactive
0,0027
0,0017

0,0011

The  collection of samples was started  at a distance of  300 m  on the leeward
side of  the  plant, since at a closer distance the odor  of hexamethylenedia-
mine was  clearly perceptible.

     The  results of the study of pollution of atmospheric air are shown
in Table  5.
                                                    Table 5

                 Contamination of Atmospheric Air with Hexamethylenediamine
                                around an HA Plant
Distance
From
Source, m
300
500
Number of
Samples
Total
2.1
56
Posi-
tive
15
I
Concentration,
rng/m'
Maximum
0.012
—
Aver-
age
o.ooi'i
0,0010
Distribution of _
Concentrations, rag/m?
Above
0.01
1
—
O.OI-
0.006
3
—
0.005-
0.002
7
—
0.001
and
below
4
1
     The atmospheric air around the plant  at  a distance of  300 m is  con-
taminated with  hexamethylenediamine in  concentrations several times  greater
than the highest  single maximum permissible concentration that we are pro-
posing.  At  a distance of 500 m, of the 56 collected samples, hexamethylene-
diamine was  observed in only one, and only in the amount of 0.001 mg/m^.

     Since other  chemical compounds are also  discharged by  the HA plant
into the atmospheric air, the problem of the  width of the sanitary protective
zone can be  solved only on the basis of a  hygienic evaluation of the entire
group of chemical substances discharged into  the atmosphere.
                                      -.-.27 -

-------
                                        Conclusions

       1.   The threshold  of olfactory  perception of hexamethylenediamine
in  the  most  sensitive persons is 0.0032  mg/m3.   The  0.0027 mg/m3  concen-
tration is  imperceptible.

       2.   The threshold  of the reflex effect  of hexamethylenediamine  on
the light sensitivity of the  eye is  0.0027 mg/m3.   The 0.0017 mg/m3  con-
centration  did  not  cause any  significant changes.

       3.   The threshold  of the reflex effect  of hexamethylenediamine  on
the electrical  activity of  the brain corresponds to  0.0017 mg/m3.   The
0.0011  mg/m3 concentration  is the subthreshold level.

       4.   On  the basis of the  data obtained,  a highest  single  maximum
permissible  concentration of  hexamethylenediamine of 0.001 mg/m3  is
proposed.
                                    LITERATURE  CITED
                B.irnoua  M. J\  3aoo.nei)ac.MOCTi> KOXCII  or SIIOKCUAMUX  CMO.H. M.,
                  1962.'   .                                  ..  '    .
                B y in T y c D a  K. A. A\cpiiOM  D03-
                  Ayxc. B c6.:  ripc.ie.ibiio AoriycriiMbie KOiiiiciiTpnnnii  atMoapcpiibix
                  aarpiDiiciiiifi. 1957, n. Ill, cip. 23.
                B o n b i|> K o D ii >i C.  II., P o r o D u ii 3. A.,  P y A c n K o 10. 11.,« III M a-
                  ii c ii K o D  II. D.  OOuiasi X!i.Mii'iccKan Tcxiio.ioniii. T.  II, M.,  1959,
                .  cip. 5-12—5-13.                    .  •  •
                }K n |> M y ii c K a n  \1. A.  D.ncKTpii'iccKnu "aKTimiiocTb  ^!03^n D uopMC,
                  npii niiicpTOini'iccKofi 6o.ic3iin n Moarouo.M inicy.ibTc. 1963, crp. 49.
                Kysncuoij  B. M.,  riiiMCiiooa  3.  M.,  Mapruiiona A. n.
                  Ko.'IOpllMCTpH'ICCKIlii  MCTOA   OllpC.HC.'iCIIIIll  rCKC 5, crp. ll—"12.
                M ;i p T u ii o ii a A.  n. 1'iir. ipy/ia n  iipo(l>. saGo.icuniinti,  1957, .V.- 4,
                  cip. 23..
                O A it iiu on a  . Fl. OO ii3.\iciiciinii  pcaKTiiiniocrii  KOJKII  y  60^11,nux
                  iipO(|)Cccnona^biiiJMii AcpManiTaMii  or ACMCTimn  snoicciMiiux CMO.I.
                  B KII.:  Bonpocw  riirnciiu ipy^a,  npo(i)iiaTo.noriin,  npo.Mbiui^ciiiioii
                  TOKciiKo.noriui n cainiTapiiOM  XIIMIUI. fopLKiiii,  1961, cip. 55—56.
                P s 3 a ii o u B. A., B y in T y c B a  K.  A., H o B u K o o 10. B. K MCTO.IM-
                  KG sKciicpiiMciiTa.ibiioro oGociiODainin npCAC.ibiio AoiiyctiiMux  KOII-
                  uciiTpamiii  atMocipcpiibix aarpno'iiciuiri.  B KM.: ripeac.ibHO .lonycin-
                  Mbic KoiiiiciiTpauini  aT.MOc(J)cpnbix   3arpn3iiciuiH.  M.,  1957,  D. 3,
                  cip. 117—151.
                Co .no n n n a  B. >Kypna^ Pyccuoro (pii3HKO-xiiMimec;
-------
 LI II P K y II 0 B Ji.  FI. 3/lCKTpOCpOpCTH'ICCKOe IICC.;IC;T.ODailllC Ge.lKOil CW-
   DOPOTKII  Kpomi y  >i;miOTiibix,  cciicii6n.nii3iipoiiaiiiibix  anoKCimiibiMit
   cMO/ia.Mii ii lix OTnepAiiTC.Di.Mii.  B  KM.: rnriiciin   ;i  (])ii3iio.ionin  Tpy-
   A.I,  npoiisnoACTucmian TOKCiiKp.ioriiH,   K/iinniKa   npo^ccciioKa.ibiibix
   aaCo.ncuaiiin'i. KIICD,  1963, ctp. "106—108.
 C c M c n c ii K.O A. A-, B a n a in c n  B. 11.  MciojuiKa  Ko.iinccTncinioro
   aHa.iii3apcaKn.nii  ncnuniKii  a;u,c|)a-piiTMa  ic.ioocKa   npn  /icfiCToiiH
   aiMociJicpiibix aarpmneiiiifi: .B KII.:  MaTcpiia-ribi K0ii(l)cpcnnii!i  no  IITO-
   ra,\i  itay'iiihix iicc/iCAonniniii  na 1963 r. MucTiiTyia  oCuiefi  n  xo.M\:y-
   iia^biioii  niniciibi  IIMCIIII A.  H.  Cbicmia   AMU   CCCP.  M..  19C4,
   crp.  3-1—35.   .          .                                  ...
 Andcrson'C.  R.  Arch. Derm. Sypli.,  1950. v. 61. N. 1.  p.  111-112.
 C a 1 n o ii  C.  D..  Wilson  H. T. H. Brit.  mcd. J..  1956. N. 4959.
   p. M7—149.' .  '                       .            '      '
 Ceres a  C.. Bias is  M. La  Mcdicina  del Lavoro, 1950, v. 41, N. 3.
   p.'78—85.                                    .          ...,-.
 C u r t i u s T h.. Clem ni H. J. prnkt. clicin., 1900, Bd. 62. S. 189—211.
 Dobkc v i t ch'S.,  B aer R.  Z. J.  Invest.  Derm.,   1917, v.  6. N. 6.
   p. 419—420.
' D u v c r n e v i 1 G.,  Buisson G. Arch, malad. profess., 1952, v.  13,
   N. 4, p. 389-390.
 F a n b u r g  S. I. J. A. M. A..  1940. v. 115. N. 3. p. 354.
 Gipstein E. Connecticut state Mcd. J.,  1941, v. 5,  N.  4.  p. 273.
 Jansson H. K: 7.. Haul- und  Gcschlechskr..   1959,  Bd. 24, H. 2.
   5 37	3g    .               .                      •         .
 Last  S.  H.  ct.al. Science.  1950.  v. 112,  N. 2919.  p. 719.
 Morris   G.  E.  Bcrufsdcrmntoscn, I960,-  Bd.  8,  H.  3,  S.  155—160.
 Opcnhcimcr  B. S. et al.  Science. 1953. v.  US, N. 3063;  p.  .305.
 Rein  C., Rogin I. Arch. Derm. Syph.,  1950, v. 61, N. 6, p.  971—9S3..
 S c h w e i s h c i ni c r \V.  Rayon  Textile  Atonlhly.  1948.  v.  29. N. 2,
   -p. 79.  .             .                                     .
 Pa ton W. Pharinacol. Rev..  1957, v. 9,-N. 2.  p.  269-328.  .
 Sidney  W., Jcnnes M. Mcd. Surg.,  1951, v. 20,  N. 6. p. 272.
 The mi me P. Bull. Soc. franc.  Derm. Syph., 1955, t.  62, N.  4. p. 452.
 Zawahr.y  M. U.  Brit.  J. Derm.,  1956, v. 63,  N. 2,  p. 59-60.
                               -  29--

-------
           CONTAMINATION OF ATMOSPHERIC AIR WITH MALEIC ANHYDRIDE

                        AND ITS HYGIENIC EVALUATION


                             K. V. Grigor'yeva
                 Ukrainian Scientific Research Institute of Communal Hygiene

From "Biologicheskoe deystvie i gigienicheskoe  znachenie atmosfernykh
zagryazneniy".  Pod redaktsiey Prof. V. A. Ryazanova i Prof. M. S. Gol'dberga.
Izdatel'stvo "Meditsina" Moskva, p. 42-57, (1966).
     Maleic anhydride, C^j^O-j, is a white crystalline powder with a  fairly
pungent odor, boils at 202°C. and sublimes.  It is used as the raw material
for the preparation of valuable lacquer-paints, and plasticizers in  the
production of artificial resins.

     Maleic anhydride is obtained from the oxidation of benzene, furfural,
or any other hydrocarbons of the paraffin and olefin series with more  than
four carbon atoms.  The method of preparation of maleic anhydride from waste
products of phthalic anhydride formed by catalytic oxidation of naphthalene
by atmospheric oxygen at high temperature- has come into widespread use.
In this process, 7-15% of maleic anhydride is formed.  The mixture of  vapors
of phthalic and maleic anhydrides, naphthoquinone , carbon monoxide and water
is fed into special units for condensation of phthalic anhydride on  cooling.
The uncondensed vapor of all these substances form the tail gases, which
are then fed into a scrubber.  Maleic anhydride is obtained from the wash
waters by evaporation.

     The residual gases after the scrubber, consisting of vapors and aerosols
of maleic and phthalic anhydrides and naphthoquinone, are discharged into
the atmosphere.

     The toxic properties of maleic anhydride have been described in very
few papers.  Acute poisoning is characterized by an irritating effect  on
the mucous membranes of the eye and upper respiratory tract (N. V. Lazarev,
1954).

     Menschick (1955) studied the health of workers over the course  of
20 months since the start of operation of equipment for synthesizing phthalic
anhydride.  The air of the plant was contaminated with a number of substances
including phthalic and maleic anhydrides, naphthoquinone, and carbon monoxide.
The author found a significant decline in the health of the workers, manifested
in disorders of the nervous system (fits of excitation, tetanic state, sen-
sitivity impairments in the area of the trigeminal nerve) , hypersecretory
excitation of the stomach, increased permeability of the stomach wall  and
                                     - 30 -

-------
vessel walls, anginal pains, decrease of systolic and diastolic pressures
(of central origin), irritation of the mucous membrane of the eye (con-
junctivitis), blood effusion in the nasal cellular tissue up to and includ-
ing nasal hemorrhages, and ulcerations of the mucosa of the larynx, pharynx,
trachea, and bronchi, blood changes (normochromic anemias, leucocytoses,
thrombopenia), a sharp decrease in the content of vitamin C in the organism,
and impairment of the phosphorus and calcium metabolism.

     Marsico and Rozero (1957) cite nine cases of acute poisoning with
maleic anhydride in loaders during its loading.  The symptoms of poisoning
are characterized primarily by the irritant action of the poison: an acute
irritation of the mucous membranes of the eye, nose, and upper respiratory
tract.

     Angielski and Rogulski (1960) describe the aminoaciduria and decrease
of protein and protein-free SH groups in the kidneys of animals which had
received maleic anhydride in subcutaneous injections in doses of 250-300
mg/kg.

     M. P. Slyusar' and I. A.  Cherkasov (1961), while administering maleic
anhydride to experimental animals by inhalation, found a considerable
weight decrease, a drop in vitamin C content of the tissues, and an increase
of total protein in the blood serum.  The-authors observed the earliest and
most substantial changes in a study of the phagocytic activity of neutro-
philes.

     These few studies show that maleic anhydride is a toxic substance.
However, there are no data on its content in atmospheric air, the effect
of low concentrations on man has not been studied, and no maximum permis-
sible concentration has been established for the atmospheric air of popu-
lated areas.

     Considering these facts and the necessity of expanding the production
of maleic and phthalic anhydride for the national economy, the Committee
on Sanitary Protection of Atmospheric Air charged the Ukrainian Institute
of Communal Hygiene with the problem of investigating the contamination of
the atmosphere with maleic anhydride in the surroundings  of a chemical
plant and with submitting a hygienic evaluation of the values obtained.

     The study of the atmosphere was made by using a polarographic method
developed by I. B. Kogan (1958) and slightly modified by us.  Maleic
anhydride was trapped from air on an FPP-15 filter, then in two sequentially
connected absorbing containers filled with 10 ml of a 0.1 N solution of
hydrochloric acid.  The polarography was carried out after dissolving the
maleic anhydride collected on the filter in the liquid from the first
absorber.  The half-wave potential of maleic anhydride is 0.69.  The sensi-
tivity of the method is 1 mg per ml.  The accuracy of the method is ^10-15%.
                                   - 31 -

-------
Phthalic anhydride, benzole  acid  and  a-naphthoquinone  do not interfere
with the determination.  The  atmospheric  air around the plant complex
was collected at distances of 500,  1000,  and 2000  m from it.  Two series
of samplings were carried out.  The results  of  the study are listed in
Table 1.

     The highest maleic anhydride concentrations were  found at a distance
of 500 m from the plant, while  at the distance  of  2000 m the maleic
anhydride content in all 28  samples was below the  sensitivity limit of the
method.

     The second stage of the study  consisted in an experimental validation
of the maximum permissible concentration  of  maleic anhydride in atmospheric
air.  This was done by using the  methods  recommended by the Committee on
Sanitary Protection of Atmospheric  Air (V. A.  Ryazanov, K.  A. Bushtuyeva,
and Yu. V. Novikov, 1957).

     An experimental mixture of vapors and aerosols of maleic anhydride
was obtained by heating it in distillation flasks  on a water bath at 37°C.

     To solve the problem of  the  highest  single maximum permissible concen-
tration of maleic anhydride,  the  threshold of smell and its irritating
effect on the upper respiratory tract as  well as the threshold of the
reflex effect on the functional state of  the cerebral  cortex were determined.
To determine the threshold of olfactory sensation  and  irritating' effect,
753 determinations were made with the 12  subjects.   The results obtained
are given in Table 2.

                                                       Table 1
                     Content of Maleic Anhydride in Air Samples Collected
                           in the Area of the Chemical Complex
Distance .
From Sounce
. of :
Discharges, m
Number
of Tests
Number of
Positive
Samples''
Concentration, mg/m5 .
Maximum . .
Average
                                    First Serites
                      1000
                      2ono
16
 9
2,6
0,29
•- . ' . Second Series.
• '500 •
1 000
2000
78
37
19
29
11
• . —
. 0,06
0.015

0,007
.0,001-

     During the inhalation of maleic  anhydride  in  concentrations from 8 to
11 mg/m^, a strong reflex cough, buring  in  the  laryngeal part of the pharynx,
and lachrymation in the majority of subjects, were observed.
                                     - 32 -

-------
     A concentration from 5 to  7 mg/m^  causes  the perception  of  odor and
irritation of the upper respiratory tract.

     Maleic anhydride in concentrations  from 2  to 3  mg/m-' has an insignifi-
cant odor and a slight irritating effect.

                                                 Table 2
                  Thresholds of Perception of Odor and Irritating  Effect
                              of Maleic Anhydride.

Number
nf
Subjects
r
2
1
1
- 1
1 '
5
Concentration, mg/ni3
Smell
Minimum
Perceptible
1,7 •
,6
.5
• ,4
.4
,4
,3
Imper-
ceptible
,6
,5
,4
,3
,3
,3
.2
Irritating Effect •
Minimum
Perceptible
.5
' .2
,1
,4
,1
.0
,0
Imper-
ceptible
1.4
1.1
1.0
1,2
1.0
0,9
0.9
     A concentration of  1.3 mg/m^ is  the odor  threshold  for the  most
sensitive persons.  Symptoms of the irritating action  are  of major sig-
nificance here.  The subjects note dryness  and tickling  in the lower  part of
the pharynx.  The  threshold concentration for  the  irritating effect was found
to be 1 mg/m^.  It gives a sensation  of freshness  and  a  barely perceptible
tickling.

     The next stage of the study was  the determination of  the influence of
low maleic anhydride concentrations on the  reflex  change of the  light sen-
sitivity of the eye.

     A number of authors (F. I. Dubrovskaya, K.  A.  Bushtuyeva, M.  T.  Takhirov,
N. F. Izmerov, G.  I. Solomin, and others) have demonstrated that this method
permits the recording of the change in the  cerebral cortex caused by  stimu-
lation of the reflexogenic zones of respiratory  organs by  slight concentra-
tions of chemical  substances.  The light sensitivity of  the eye  was studied
with the aid of an ADM adaptometer.   The threshold of  the  irritating  effect
of maleic anhydride was  first determined in  three  subjects.   The course of
dark adaptation was studied while supplying  pure air and a gaseous mixture
containing 6.2, 1.65 and 0.85 mg/m-^ of maleic  anhydride.   Each concentration
was studied no fewer than three times.  A total  of 78  determinations  were
made.  The results of the examination are given  in Table 3.

     The 6.2 and 1.65 mg/m^ concentrations  caused  a reliable change of the
light sensitivity  of the eye in all the subjects during  the 20th minute in
comparison with pure air.  The 0.85 mg/m3 concentration  was found to  be
inactive.
                                     - 33 -

-------
                                                                                                                   Table 3
 I
to
                                             Average Values of the Lighjt Sensitivity of the Eye  in Relative Units
                                               During Inhalation  of Different Maleic Anhydride Concentrations.
Subject
M.
K. '
T.
15th Minute
Pure
Air
58500
81250
51020
Maleic Anhydride
0.85
64700
66466
48400
1.65
54766
62760
57 966
6.2
59200
59550
—
•- 20th Minute
Pure
Air
73380
94550
61360
"1'Sleic Anhydride
0.85
75433
60633
60433
1.65
53500 (a)
67 620 (a)
113333(a)
6.2
55900 (a)
72 850 (c)
—
25th Minute
Pure
Air
82220
104450
77 180
Maleic Anhydride
0.85.
83800
95 166
73333
1.65
63566
75380 (a)
120566
6.2
81 100
74 350 (c)
—
                            Note.  Confidence factor:  a - 99#, b - 99$, c - 99.956.

-------
        y.

       ' no-
       ii o-
       100-
       so-
       to-
    £  10-
        w-
        JO-
        20-
        W
W    15     20
                                              30 Tine'
       Fig. 1.  Effect  of  maleic  anhydride  on the.
       light sensitivity of  the eye  in  subject T.
       1 - pure air; 2  - concentration,  0.85 mg/rn^
               3 - 1.65  mg/m3;
in

I
too-

so
so
 w-

60-
so-


30-


 10

Fig

1 -
                     10
      15
20
      /      IU      I)      W      Si .     -
-------
     Dark adaptation  curves  for  two  subjects  illustrate  the influence of
maleic anhydride  on the  light sensitivity  of  the  eye  (Figs. 1,  2).

     Thus,  the  threshold  of  the  effect  of  maleic  anhydride on the light
sensitivity of  the eye is  1.65 mg/m3, and  0.85  mg/m3  is  a subthreshold
concentration.  Assuming  a certain storage coefficient,  one can recommend
0.5 mg/m3 as  the  highest  single  maximum permissible  concentration of maleic
anhydride.

     To study the effect  of  low  maleic  anhydride  concentrations under
conditions of an  extended, continuous experiment  on  laboratory  animals,
a round-the-clock exposure of white  rats was  conducted for 70 days.

     The experiments  involved 50 male rats weighing 90 to 120 g.   The
exposure was carried  out  in  5 chambers  containing 10  rats each.

     The first  group  of rats was subjected to the action of maleic
anhydride in 0.03 mg/m3 concentration,  the second to  0.08 mg/m3,  the
third to 0.34 mg/m3,  the  fourth  to 0.8  mg/m3, and the fifth was the  con-
trol group.   The exposure was made in two  series:  1) with 0.08,  0.34, and
0.8 mg/m3 concentrations;  2) with 0.03  mg/m3  concentration.   Each series
had its own control.  The  effect of maleic anhydride  in  different concen-
trations is described without separation into series.

     During the course of  the exposure,  air samples were taken  from  the
chambers almost daily.  The  concentrations  in the  chambers varied between
the following limits:   in  the first group,  from traces to 0.042 mg/m3, in
the second from traces to 0.2 mg/m3, in  the third from traces to  0.78 mg/m3,
and in the fourth from 0.3 to 1.56 mg/m3.

     The fluctuations  of the concentrations are shown in Fig. 3.
                                                    Table 4

             Weight of Animals Subjected to Chronic Action of Maleic Anhydride.
Avfwrage
Y.'eight of
Animal
Before tfee
start of
exposure



During
exposure



Group and Concen-
tration in mg/ra'3
Control
First (0.03)
• Control i
Second (0.08)
Third (0.34)
Fourth (0.8)
Control
. First (0.03)
Control
Second (0.08)
Third (0.54)
Fourth (0.08)
M ± m
158. 2*12. 8
160,6 + 5,6
229. -1 ±8
212,8+9,7
•216.7 + 8,8
211,5*10,6
212 + 8,0
213 + 5,8
250,0+3.74
2'I5.2±
-------
mg/m
0.2-
'o.i-
3
A A /^ /I -.
x_/v^v v sr
     To evaluate the toxic effect of maleic anhydride, the general con-
dition of  the animals, their weight, morphological  composition  of  the
blood, content of SH groups in  the blood serum  and  phagocytic activity
of neutrophiles were followed during the experiment.   At the end  of the
exposure,  anatomic pathological analyses of the animals' organs were
made.
                                                 0,0! mg/m3
                       0  10  20.  30   i/0 SO  63  70days
                     Fig. 3. Fluctuations of maleic anhydridb
                       concentrations in the second group.,

     In  the  course of the experiment, maleic  anhydride showed  a  substan-
tial influence on the overall  condition  and weight dynamics of animals
of the third group (0.34 mg/m^)  and particularly the fourth group  (0.8
mg/m3).   In  the second  (0.08 mg/m^) and  first  (0.03 mg/m3) groups,  no
changes  were observed.  Since  the  first  days  of  contact with the substance,
the animals  of the fourth group were agitated,  constantly sniffed,  sneezed,
and rubbed  their noses with their  paws.  A few days later the  rats  calmed
down and were sluggish, failing  to become animated even during feeding.
They ate less than the  animals  in  the other groups.

     The weight change  in animals  of the third and fourth groups was
particularly pronounced during  the period of  experimental starving.
After 5  days of underfeeding  (the  rats  received  1/5 of the usual ration
during this  period) they lost more weight than the others, and the  restor-
ation of their weight was subsequently  less rapid  (Figs. 4, 5, Table 4).
           Grams
            JOO-
            m-
            2SO-
 ??o-
 200-
'W-
 160-

 ItiO-

 120
                                             Fig. 4. Average weight of rats of the
                                             second, tt)ird, fourth and control groups
                                             of the experiment during the period of
                                             exposure.
                                             1 - control group; 2 - second group    ,
                                             (0.08 mg/m3); 3 - third group (0.34 mg/nr);
                                             k - fourth group (0.8 mg/m'); AB - experi-
                                             mental starving.
                        Exposure
                                      -  37 -

-------
         Grams
         •  no-
           2?0-
           200-

           IJ0-
           ieo-
               x-'
                      A  ff.
Fig. 5.  Average weight of rats of the
first and control groups during the period
of exposure.
1 - control group; 2 - first group (0.03 mg
AB - experimental starving.
                     Exposure
      Observation  of  the state  of the morphological composition of  the
 blood did  not show any significant changes in the  amount  of hemoglobin
 in animals of any groups.  The number  of erythrocytes decreased signifi-
 cantly in  animals of the fourth group  (0.8 mg/m^).

                        20000-
                        16000-

                        11000-
                        1000
                        t/000-
                        2000
                         Background          Exposure
                        Fig. 6.  Average number of leucocytes in rats
                        of the second, third, fourth and control
                        groups during the period of exposure.
                               Notation same as in Fig. A.
      As far as  the number of leucocytes is  concerned,  stable  leucocytosis
was  observed  in animals  of the  third and  fourth groups during the period
of exposure (Fig.  7).

      No such  effect was  observed  in rats  of  the second group  (concentration
0.08 mg/m3),  but they showed an unstable  leucocytic  reaction.   This was
particularly  apparent after ten days'  starving.
                                       -  38 -

-------
                      MOO-
                      12000-
                      1000-
                      4000-
                      2000-
                         Background        Exposure
                      Fig. 7. Average number of leucocytes in
                      rats of the first and control groups during
                      the period of exposure.
                      Notation same as in Fig. 5.
      In  rats of the first  (0.03 mg/m^) and  control groups, the  number of
leucocytes  remained unchanged over the course  of the experiment (Table 5,
Figs.  6,  7).

      One  of the indices  characterizing the  influence of external factors
on the organism is the change of its immunobiological reactivity,  in
particular, the phagocytic  activity of the  neutrophiles.   Recently,  this
test  has  begun to be used  for the validation of  maximum permissible  con-
centrations of noxious chemicals (M. P. Slyusar'  and I. A. Cherkasov, 1961)
                                                         Table 5

                         Number of Leucocytes in White Rats Subjected to
                              Chronic Action of Maleic Anhydride.
Average ••
Number of .
Leucocytes

Prior to
the start
of
exposure


During^
Exposure



Group. and. Concen-. .
tration in mg/m?

Control
Firsf (0.05)
Control
Secorid (0.08)
Third (0.54)
Fourth (0.8)
Control
First (0.03)
Control
Second (0.08)
Third (0.34)
Fourth (O.e)
M±m

13 150±IOOO
11 727±518
12320 d-616
12 150+5-11
12000-1-3-16
10C90 + 8-1-1
1 4 049 + 803 ,
14204 + 335
12960 + 516
16120+935
18465 ±873
20033 + 9S8
t
Confidence
Factor
i

1,26

0,1
0,3
1,5
0,1
2,9
5,4
6,2




L


99%
99,9°/o
99,9°i
     We  determined the opsono-phagocytic numbers  (number of microbes
absorbed by  one leucocyte)  and the opsono-phagocytic activity of  leuco-
.cytes  (percent ratio of active neutrophiles to  the total number of  counted
neotrophiles)  (Table 6).

     As  is evident from Table  6,  the phagocytic activity of leucocytes in
animals  of the third and fourth groups (0.34 and  0.8 mg/m3) decreased.
                                     - 39 -

-------
In  rats  of  the  first  and second group (0.03 and 0.08 mg/nH) , the
phagocytic  activity of leucocytes did not differ in any way from the
control.

     According  to  our data,  the opsono-phagocytic numbers in animals of
all the  groups  remained unchanged during the period of the chronic
experiment.

     Protein macromolecules  carry on their surface a large number of polar
groups including mercapto groups.  When toxic substances enter the organ-
ism, they react with  these groups.   Blocking of an SH group decreases  the
protein  activity.  At the same time, the SH groups have a considerable
influence on the activity of the enzymes participating in protein, fat,
and carbohydrate metabolism.   This  in turn indicates the great influence
of  a given  functional group  of proteins on the generation, intensity and
direction of the various physiological processes (B. N. Gol'dshteyn, 1955).
                                                   Table 6

                   Opsono-phagocytic Activity of Leucocytes in White Rats
                      Subjected to Chronic Action of Maleic Anhydride.
Average Activity
of Leucocytes
Before the start
of exposure




During
.'exposure
-



Group and Concen-
tration'' in mg/m5_
' Control
First (0.03)
Control*
Second (0.08)
Third (0.3A)
Fourth (0.8)
Control
First (0.03)
Control
Second (0.08)
Third (0.3*0
Fourth (0.8)
M ± in
75,6 + 4,3
73,5+1,9
82,0-1-1,3
79,4±2,8
8-1, 
-------
 no appreciable changes of any kind  could be  demonstrated  in the  content
 of active SH groups as compared  to  the  control  group,  so  that in a repeat
 experiment with the lowest concentration, 0.03  mg/m^  (first group),  this
 test was not employed.  Blocking of the SH groups  occurred  only  in animals
 of the fourth group (0.8 mg/m3) .


                                                    Table 7

                Change in the Height of  Polarographic Waves of Protein-Free
                 Filtrate' of Blood Serum in  Rats Subjected to the Chronic
                           Action of Maleic Anhydride.
Average height-, of broup and Concen-
polarographib waves pration in mg/m*
1
.During
exposure

Control
First (0.08)
Third (0.54)
Fourth (0.8)
/'/ ± m

7.2 + 0,16
7,5±0,19
7,4 + 0,14
5,3±0,18
/

1.2
1.2
1,9
7,9
Confi-
dence
Factor


99,976
      In animals of the fourth group (0.8 mg/m^), histomorphological
 analyses made after completion of the exposure showed a vague  atrophy
 of the nasal mucosa and inflammatory changes in the  lungs, primarily
 around the medium and fine bronchi.  In the remaining groups as  compared
 to the control, no appreciable changes could be established.

      Thus, continuous chronic exposure of white rats to maleic anhydride
 for 70 days has shown that the 0.08 mg/m^ concentration has a  marked
 effect on the experimental animals, causing a weight lag, a decrease in
 the number of erythrocytes and neutrophile activity, an increase in the
 number of leucocytes, a decrease in the activity of  SH groups  of blood
 serum proteins, and inflammatory changes in the lungs.  The 0.34 mg/m3
 concentration showed a lesser effect on the animals  during the same period
 of time.   Only a weight lag, a decrease in the phagocytic activity of
 neutrophiles and an increase in the number of leucocytes were  observed.
 The 0.08 mg/m3 concentration caused only an unstable leucocytic  reaction
 in rats of this group.  Maleic anhydride in 0.03 mg/m3 concentration
 caused no changes of any kind in the experimental animals during the course
 of exposure.

      Comparison of the experimental data with indices of the content of
 the substance, detected in the surroundings of the chemical complex under
 consideration during the first series  of studies,  showed maleic anhydride
 to be present in amounts substantially exceeding the single maximum per-
 missible  concentration of maleic anhydride which we have proposed.  This
•was noted during a period when for all practical purposes the purification
 equipment was not operating.   High-efficiency scrubbers with a degree of
 purification of 98-99% (M. Kh. Tsipenyuk and Yu. Ye. Tsipenyuk, 1963) have
 now been  installed, which purify the discharge gases of the phthalic pro-
 duction,  and the highest maximum single concentrations of maleic anhydride
                                    - 41 -

-------
at a distance of 500 m from the source of discharge do not exceed our
recommended maximum permissible value of 0.5 mg/m3.
                                Conclusions

     1.  The threshold of smell of maleic anhydride in the most sensitive
persons is 1.3 mg/m3, and the threshold of irritating action is 1 mg/m3.
The imperceptible concentration for these studies was determined at
0.9 mg/m3.

     2.  The sub threshold concentration for the reflex effect on the
cerebral cortex was found to be 0.85 mg/m3.

     3.  The highest single maximum permissible concentration of maleic
anhydride in atmospheric air which can be recommended is 0.5 mg/m3.

     4.  In a round-the-clock exposure for 70 days, maleic anhydride in
0.8 mg/m3 concentration causes the following changes in white rats:
decrease of the number of erythrocytes and activity of the neutrophiles,
increase in the number of leucocytes, decrease in the activity of SH
groups of blood serum proteins, weight lag, and inflammatory changes in
the lungs.  A 0.34 mg/m3 concentration causes a decrease in the activity
of the neutrophiles, an increase in the number of leucocytes, and a weight
lag in the animals.  A concentration of 0.08 mg/m3 of maleic anhydride is
the threshold value for its toxic effect on the organism of warm blooded
animals, and a concentration of 0.03 mg/m3 is the sub threshold value.

     5.  The average daily maximum permissible concentration of maleic
anhydride in atmospheric air which can be recommended is 0.05 mg/m3.
                                    =- 42 -

-------
                      LITERATURE  CITED

A ii a T o it c K a n B  C  1'nnicna rpy;ia n npotpsaGo-ncBamtfl,  1961, A1? 5,
  CT|).  37—41.
F o n bflm TC ii M  13. H.  O njiiiuimii cy.ii.cjJni.ipiMbiiux  rpynn na  Cno-
  Jiorii'iccKiic cnoiicTiia TKaiiciiux 6e/iKou.  K.MCB. 1955.
Koran M; B.  Hir. n  can., I95S, N° 7.
Jl a 3 a p c n  H. B. Bpc,ain.ic  uemccTua D upoMUUJJiciiiiocTH.  M. I.  foe-
  xiiMii3AaT. Jl., 1954.
P n 3 a n o D  B.  A. Caiiiiiapnan  oxpana   aiMoctpcpnoro  uo3,T.yxa. M.,
  1958.
P n 3 a n o 11  B.  A., B y iu T y  e is a  K.  A., H o B n K o n  K).  B. K MCTO-
  AIIKC  SKcncpiiMCiiTa^LiMoro oOociiODaniisi npcjic.Tbiio AonycTis.Moii  KOII-
  UCiiTpamiii aTMOC(j)Cpnbix 3arpn3iiciiiifi. B  KII.:  ripc.ic.Tbiio Aoiiycrii-
  MWC aTMOC(])epiihie  3arpn3iieiiiin. M., 1957,  D.  3, crp.  117—151.
C^iocapb M. PI. n  Ll e p K a c o D  H A.  K  uonpocy o TOKCIIMCCKOU
  xapaKTepiicTiiKe   ii  riiniciiiiMccKo.M  iiopMitponaiiini Ma.nemiOBoro   an-
  rn;ipii;va.  Marcpna/ibi naymion ceccnn  no TOKciiKO.iornn BUCOKOMO.IC-
  Kyjisipnbix  cocAnnciinfi, 1961.
C o A o M n  ii f. H. rMriienn'iecKafi oueiiKa flnnn.na KBK 3arpH3niiTC.in
  aTMoc(J)cpnoro BOSAyxa. B  KII.:  npCAC.ibiio AonycTii.Mbie  Konuenipa-
  mni  3TMOc(pcpnbix aarpnaiieiiiinT A1.,  1962,  D.  6, crp.  146—163.
LJ, n n e n 10 K M. X.,  U. n n e n 10 K 10. E. Fur.  n   can.,  1963,   As I.
  crp.  66.
JI n o B c K n ii R.  H. Kapinna Kponn  n ec K.nnnii'iccKoc siiauciicc.  foe-
  Mcana/iar VCCP, KHCD, 1957.
Angielski J.,  Rogulski.  Acta   biochim.  polon.,  1960,   v. 8,
  N. 2—3,  p. 269.
Marsico  F.,  Rozero G. Folia  med.. 1957, N. 4.
M c n s c h i c k H.   Arch. Gewerbepathologic   und  Gewerbehygicne.,
  1955, N. 13.
                               - 4-3  -

-------
             BIOLOGICAL EFFECT  OF LOW NITROBENZENE CONCENTRATIONS

                             IN  ATMOSPHERIC AIR


                             N. G.  Andreyeshcheva
                       Communal Hygiene Department, Central Institute
                          for Advanced Training 'of Physicians

From   "Biologicheskoe  deystvie i  gigienicheskoe  znachenie  atmosfernykh
zagryazneniy".  Pod redaktsiey Prof.  V. A.  Ryazanova  i Prof.  M.  S.  Gol'dberga.
Izdatel'stvo  "Meditsina" Moskva,  p.  58-73,  (1966).
     Nitrobenzene, CgH5N02 , is  the simplest nitro  compound  of  the  aromatic
series.  It is a pale yellow  liquid with  a bitter  almond  odor.   The  boiling
point is 210. 8°C. , the specific gravity 1.21,  and  the melting  point  5.7°C.
Nitrobenzene dissolves readily  in fats, alcohol, and ether  and is  insoluble
in acids and alkalis.  It is  prepared by  nitrating benzene.

     Nitrobenzene is widely employed in aniline  dye plants  in  the  production
of artificial aniline dyes, explosives, drugs, etc.  During the current
seven-year plan (1959-1965),  the output of aniline dyes will double,  thereby
sharply increasing the production and consumption  of nitrobenzene.

     The toxic properties of  nitrobenzene as a result of  the action  of
large doses on the organism are marked (V. K. Navrotskiy, 1955;  K. I. Morozova,
1934; Laubender, Schwamb, 1951; Goldstein, Popovici, 1958;  P.  Sulamit, 1960,
1962).

     The authors administered nitrobenzene chiefly subcutaneously  and
perorally, most frequently once.  Its effect on  the blood hemoglobin  is  the
most pronounced.  It involves the formation of methemoglobinemia followed
by sulfhemoglobinemia; the activity of the blood catalase and  peroxidase
decreases, Heinz bodies are formed intensively,  and the number of  erythrocytes
and reticulocytes decreases.

     The chronic effect of nitrobenzene in small doses, chiefly on the
secretory function of the stomach and partly on  the blood,  was  studied only
with peroral introduction by  M. I. Kazakova (1954) and G. A. Kalashnikova
(1955).

     The lack of data on the  toxicity of small doses of nitrobenzene  during
long-term inhalational penetration into the organixm or data on its  contam-
ination of atmospheric air has  led to a study of the biological effect of
low nitrobenzene concentrations and of its hygienic importance  as  an  air
pollutant.
                                     -  44 -

-------
     The experimental  part  of  the  study  was  carried out by using a method
 of  determination  of  low nitrobenzene  concentrations in atmospheric air
 proposed by  M.  V.  Alekseyeva.   The method  is based on the absorption of
 nitrobenzene by a nitrating mixture.   This forms  dinitrobenzene, which is
 determined from the  purple  color formed  by its  reaction with a ketone or
 alkali.  The sensitivity  of the method is  0.25  mg in a volume of 2 ml.

     We selected  the optimum conditions  for  complete nitration of low
 nitrobenzene concentrations (50 minutes  in a boiling water bath).  The
 nitrobenzene concentrations were measured  in a  photoelectrocolorimeter
 with a green filter  or a  spectrophotometer at a wavelength of 560-570 my
 after first  recording  the calibration curves.

     We started the  validation  of  the highest single maximum permissible
 concentration of  nitrobenzene  in atmospheric air, in accordance with the
 recommendation  of the  Committee on Sanitary  Protection of Atmospheric Air,
 from the determination of the  threshold  of olfactory sensation.  The exper-
 iment involved  the participation of 29 practically healthy people aged 17-35,

                                                    Table 1
                  Results of Determination of Olfactory  Sensation Threshold
                                of Nitrobenzene.

Number of Subjects
4
2
7 '
8
4
1
1
1
1
Nitrobenzene Concentration, ms/m^ .
Threshold
0,0182
0,023
0,027
0,031
0,037
0,0-15
0,057
0,070
0,09-1
Subthreshold
0,0169
0,018
0,020
0,024
0.028
0,032
0,011
0,055
• 0,069
     The olfactory sensation was  tested  once every  24 hours.   A total of
1252 determinations were made, and it was  found  that in  the most sensitive
persons, the minimum perceptible  concentration of nitrobenzene was
0.0182 mg/m3 (Table 1).

     'In the works of several authors  (K. A. Bushtuyeva,  1957;  F.  I.  Dubrov-
skaya, 1957; M. M. Plotnikova, 1957,  and others), the dark adaptation method
was used for studying  the threshold of reflex action.  We used this  method
in three cases.  The smell of subthreshold  concentrations of nitrobenzene
affected the light sensitivity of the visual system in all three subjects.
Results of the experiment are listed  in  Table 2.
                                     - 45 -

-------
                                                  Table 2

              Results of Determination of the Change in the Light Sensitivity
                    of the Eye During Inhalation of Nitrobenzene.
Subject
S. ,
G.
V.
Concentration, mg/m5
Light Sensitivity
Threshold
0,0157
0,0167
. 0,0168
Subthreshold
0,0118
0,01-1 '1
0, 01-14
Olfactory Sensation
Threshold '
' 0,0182
0,0182
'0,0230
Subthreshold
0,0169
0,0169
0,0190
     In one of the  three subjects, a nitrobenzene  concentration of
0.0157 mg/m^ caused a reliable decrease  of  the  light  sensitivity of the
eye which may be considered the threshold sensitivity in  this  method
(Fig. 1).  The method of dark adaptation made it possible to  reveal the
effect of Subthreshold nitrobenzene concentrations  for olfactory sensation
on the functional activity of the  central nervous  system.   Electroencephal-
ographic studies were also made to determine  the reflex effect of nitro-
benzene.

     In hygienic practice, the study of brain biocurrents  was  started by
using the method of development of the electrocortical conditioned reflex
(K. A. Bushtuyeva, Ye. F. Polezhayev, and A. D. Semenenko, 1960; V. A. Gof-
mekler, 1961, and others).

     In subsequent studies use was also made of the method of  functional
loading with calculation of the amplitude of the assimilated  rhythm to
light stimulation (A. D. Semenenko, 1963; N. B. Imasheva,  1963; V. I. Fila-
tova, 1962, and others).

     We used the electroencephalographic method of  reinforcement of
intrinsic brain potentials under conditions of  functional loading with
flickering light of varying intensity, proposed by  A.  D.  Semenenko.  The
method is based on  the ability of  the central nervous system  to produce a
reinforcement of the intrinsic potentials in response to  the  action of a
rhythmic stimulus.

     The observations were made on six practically  healthy people 20-35
years, of age who had not previously been in contact with  the  chemical
substances.

     The electrical activity of the brain was recorded on a Kaiser 8-channel
electroencephalograph with a photostimulator.  The  biocurrents were taken
off the temporal and occipital areas uni- and bipolarly.   Simultaneously,
the respiration and a myogram were recorded.
                                     - 46 -

-------
                          S W IS  20 ?5 JO    tO. _
                        Time of examination, minutes
                     Fig. 1. Change irv;the light ..sensitivity
                     of the eye during inhalation of nitrobenzene
                     in subject S.
                     1 - pure air; 2 - concentration, 0.0118
                     ng/ra?; 5 - 0.0157 rag/in3; k - 0.0169 mg/ra?
     Stimulation by rhythmic light with  a frequency equal  to  that of the
intrinsic  potentials of the brain  (10-12 seconds) and with different
intensities was  carried out every  2 minutes for 45 seconds.   During this
period,  the intensity of the flash of  the photostimulator  lamp  was changed
9 times.

     One of the  channels of the instrument was connected to a Balashov
integrator, which made it possible to  obtain the total energy output in
the form of 9  spikes measured in millimeters during processing  of the
cu rve.

   •  After establishing the background (obtaining curves during inhalation
of pure  air),  nitrobenzene was supplied  in concentrations  below the value
of the  threshold of smell.  The inhalation of the gas lasted  6  minutes and
was carried out  from the 8-th to the 14-th minute of the experiment.  The
first 6 minutes  of the recording on the  day of gas inhalation constituted
the background for the given day of the  examination.  After disconnecting
the gas, the recording of the curves was continued in the  same  sequence up
                                     - 47 -

-------
 to  the  24-26th minute of  the  experiment, until  a tendency to restore  the
 initial level of intrinsic  rhythm appeared.  The experiments with  inhal-
 ation  of nitrobenzene were  alternated with the  inhalation of pure  air.
 Concentrations of 0.0129  and  of 0.008 mg/m^ were investigated.  The
 0.0129  mg/m3 nitrobenzene concentration was found to be active in  five
 subjects,  while the 0.008 mg/m^ concentration was the subthreshold value
 for  them.   One subject was  found to be less sensitive (Table 3).

                                                    Table -3
                   Results of Study of Reflex Effect of Nitrobenzene
                        by Functional Electroencephalography.


Subject
•
Kh. -
G.
I.
L.
A.
Ya.'
Corfcentration; mg/ra^
El'eatroencephalography

Threshold
0,0129
0,0129
0,0129
0,0129
—
0,0129
Sub-
threshold
0,008
0,008
0,008
0,008
0,0129
0,008
Olfactory Sensation

Threshold
0,0177
0,0182
0,027
0,027
0,0182
—
Sub-
threshold
0,0160
0,0169
0,02
0,02
0,0169
—
     Analysis  of the electroencephalographic curves  established that  in one
subject  (Kh.)  after a 6-minute  inhalation of nitrobenzene, no restoration
of the rhythm  and energy occurred,  not only during  the 24 minutes of  the
experiment,  but also 40-50 minutes  after the gas was disconnected during
a 20-30  minute rest.  Changes in  the curve of this subject (Fig. 2) took
place in the 10th minute of  the experiment, 2 minutes after the gas was
supplied, were then reinforced  in the 14th minute, when the gas was dis-
connected,  and during the following 2 minutes.  The  confidence factor of
the changes  reached 99.9%.
                                  w   /?   i,
                      AB - period of''gas inhalation.
                                      -  48 -

-------
     As a result of  the analysis of  the  curves, we  came  to  the  conclusion
that the method employed in  the study of the reflex effect  of atmospheric
pollutants is highly sensitive.

     On the basis of studies of the  threshold of olfactory  sensation  of
nitrobenzene, its influence  on the light sensitivity of  the visual  system,
and a study of the reflex effect of  nitrobenzene on the  electrical  activity
of the human brain, we recommend the highest single maximum permissible
concentration of nitrobenzene in atmospheric air of populated areas as
0.008 mg/m3, the subthreshold concentration according  to the most sensitive
method (Table 4).

                                             Table 4

                       Results of Study of the Reflex Effect
                              of Nitrobenzene.

Threshold

.Olfactory sensation
Effect on light sensi-
tivity of the eye
Effect on electrical
actiVity of cerebral
cortex
Concentration, mg/m^
Minimum
Active
0.0182

0,0157

0,0129
Maximum
Inactive
0,0169

0,0118

0,008
     To substantiate the average daily maximum permissible concentration
of nitrobenzene, a round-the-clock dynamic exposure of white rats was
carried out for 73 days.

     Four groups of male white rats with 18 in each group were exposed.
In the first group, the nitrobenzene concentration was 0.8 * 0.022 mg/m.3,
in the second 0.08 * 0.01 mg/m3, in the third 0.008 * 0.0008 mg/m3,  and
the fourth group was the control.

     It is known from the literature that nitrobenzene affects chiefly the
blood.  However, the clinical picture of poisoning with nitrobenzene indi-
cates the possibility of selective injury to the central nervous system
(Ya.  I. Kukhta et al., 1934).

     This enabled us to select the following tests characterizing the
influence on the central nervous system as the chief indicators of the
effect of nitrobenzene on the organism:  behavior and weight of the  animals,
motor chronaxy of the antagonist muscles of the shin, cholinesterase
activity, and on the blood - total hemoglobin, methemoglobin, sulfhemoglobin
and oxyhemoglobin, Heinz bodies, and histopathological data.
                                      - 49 -

-------
     The investigation lasted 101 days.  During the first week of exposure,
irritation of the upper respiratory tract (head cold, sneezing) and the
appearance of a serous crust on the eyelids were observed in rats of the
first group  (0.8 mg/m^).  A few days later, these symptoms passed.  The
animals were active in all groups except the first, in which a periodic
sluggishness of the rats was noted.

     No statistically reliable changes in the weight of the animals of
all three groups were observed as compared with the control group.

     The central nervous system under normal conditions has a subordinate
influence on the neuromuscular system, as expressed in a correct ratio of
the chronaxias of the extensors and flexors.  When the process of inhibi-
tion arises  in the cerebral cortex, this ratio changes and even becomes
inverted (Chao Cheng-ch'i, 1961; V. A. Gofmekler, 1961, and others).

     We studied the chronaxy and rheobase of antagonist muscles of the
hind leg of  the rat by means of an ISE-01 electronic pulse chronaximeter
once every ten days in six rats of each group during the first half of
exposure and in five rats during the second half.

     An inverse ratio of the chronaxies of antagonist muscles in rats of
the first group (0.8 mg/m^) occurred on the llth day and was preserved
during the entire exposure.  In rats of the second group (0.08 mg/m3), the
inversion of the ratio was observed on the 21st day and was also preserved
during the entire period of the experiment.  A disturbance of the correct
ratio of the chronaxies of antagonist muscles occurred as a result of an
increase in  the chronaxy of the flexors (the confidence factor of the
changes reached 95-99%).  The reestablishment of the correct ratio of
chronaxies was observed after ten days of the recovery period.  No change
of the ratios occurred in the third group (Fig. 3).

     During  the development of inhibitory processes in the centers, an
accumulation of acetylcholine takes place in the tissues.  An increase in
the activity of cholinesterase is one of the mechanisms of compensation
for this disturbance (D. Ye. Al'pern, 1958, and others).

     The study of cholinesterase activity of whole blood was made every
fortnight by using A.  A. Pokrovskiy's chemical method (1953) modified by
A. P.  Martynova (1957).

     The nitrobenzene concentration of 0.8 mg/m-^ (first group) caused in
the rats a statistically reliable increase of cholinesterase activity
(99.9%) on the 12th day of exposure, and the 0.08 mg/m3 concentration
(second group), starting on the 39th day of exposure.   During the recovery
period, the  cholinesterase activity returned to the initial level in both
the first and second groups.  The cholinesterase activity in-rats of the
                                    - 50 -

-------
third group (0.008 mg/rn^)  was  similar to that of  the control group over
the  course  of the entire study (Fig.  4).
                  IS63
u

i n
t,U
.


0J'

0
• H
-p
£ 0.1-


*












^~-/V
X 	 SV 	 :— '•==r:
'—* 	 J
N- 	 ^
"v N^ t^'.
^ — - — . >•'
X ^•••^..'^
N ,
>---. • / '
-^v '/
«* /
^^ /
^ ^ /
. >»

1

^/
.'' /
/
/
/
f








                    I5/X
                                                    7/xl
                                 Dates of investigation
               Fig. 3.  Ratio of chronaxies of antagonist muscles during'"
                        chronic exposure to nitrobenzene.
               1 - first group (0.08 mg/rn'); 2 -'second group (0.08 mg/m^
               3 - third group (0.008 mg/m5); k - fourth group, control;
                             AB - period of exposure.
      The disturbance of  the correct ratio of  chronaxies of  antagonist
muscles and  the increase in the  cholinesterase activity of  the blood indi-
cates the  presence  of inhibitory processes in the  central nervous  system,
arising from the  influence of nitrobenzene vapors.

               Minutes ^                                   ff

                      JksE-
                30-
               • 20-
                10-
                iU3
                Fig. 4.
          Date of investigation
Activity of cholinesterase of whole blood in rats
during chronic exposure to nitrobenzene.
         Notation same as ih Fig.- 3.
                                         -  51 -

-------
     Of late, the literature increasingly emphasizes the view that the
basis for  the various disturbances during poisoning with aromatic
nitroamino derivatives are changes in respiratory enzymes.  The formation
of methemoglobin itself is attributed to the depression of certain
intraerythrocytic oxidation-reduction enzyme systems whose normal activity
consists in reducing methemoglobin to active hemoglobin (P. Sulamit et al.,
1960).

     Sulfhemoglobin may be formed as an intermediate in the formation of
bile pigments from hemoglobin.

     To measure the total hemoglobin, methemoglobin, Sulfhemoglobin and
oxyhemoglobin (every 10 days), we chose the method of determination of
hemoglobin with a photoelectrocolorimeter (Evelyn, Malloy, 1938).  The
quantity of blood employed was decreased to 0.05 ml.  We did the determ-
ination with an SF-5 spectrophotometer.

     In rats of all groups, the total hemoglobin before exposure ranged
from 10.307 to 13.453 g per 100 ml of blood; there was up to 1.63%
methemoglobin of the total hemoglobin, up to 0.28% Sulfhemoglobin, and
up to 98.0-98.95% oxyhemoglobin of the total hemoglobin.

     During exposure in rats of the first group (0.8 mg/m3), on the 19th
day of exposure, as the methemoglobin increased from 4.20 to 12.65%, there
was a sharp decrease in the amount of total hemoglobin (7.565-9.252 g per
100 ml of blood) and oxyhemoglobin (87.01-95.27%).  In rats of the second
group (0.08 mg/nH), the changes were similar in nature but somewhat less
pronounced.

     Starting with the 48th day of exposure, an increase of Sulfhemoglobin
to 1.91% with a sharp decrease of methemoglobin were noted in animals of
the first group.  At the same time, the total hemoglobin slightly increased.
In the second group on the 58th day of exposure, Sulfhemoglobin increased
up to 1.40% in some rats.   These changes were preserved until the end of
the exposure (Fig. 5).

     Restoration of the amount of hemoglobins to the original level occurred
on the 12th day after completion of the exposure.   In rats of the third
group, the content of hemoglobins did not exceed the limits of fluctuations
of these indicators in animals of the control group (see Fig. 5).

     Isolated Heinz bodies appeared on the 48th day of exposure in rats of
the second group only (0.8 mg/m^).

     Thus, nitrobenzene in concentrations of 0.8 and 0.08 mg/nH during
long-term round-the-clock penetration of the organism of white rats decreases
the quantity of total hemoglobin and oxyhemoglobin, causes methemoglobinemia,
and subsequently sulfhemoglobinemia.   A nitrobenzene concentration of
                                     - 52 -

-------
 0.008 mg/m3 was  shown to be inactive by all the tests,  and we therefore
 propose it as  the average daily maximum permissible  concentration in
 atmospheric air.
               g/100 ml of blood
               Ah"
               I!
               J
                                    1

               1.2
             E

E

                              ;-H

MM
                               hi

                             i/    i/    1^    I*

              Fig. 5.  Content of total hemoglobin (i), methemoglobin (ll) and'
              sulfhemoglobin (ill) of the blood in rats during chronic exposure
                                 to nitrobenzene.
                             Notation same as in Fig. 5.

     On  the  basis of the experimental studies, we  attempted to  follow the
process  of  action of nitrobenzene  on the  organism,  in  particular,  on the
hemoglobin  system, during long-term inhalation of  low  concentrations.   The
extent of the action is indicated  by sulfhemoglobin, whose quantity  in-
creased  not  only in percent ratio  to the  total hemoglobin but also in
absolute terms,  in milligrams per  100 ml  of blood.
                                     .- 53 -

-------
     Methemoglobinemia and sulfhemoglobinemia constitute one of the
 characteristic biochemical manifestations of nitrobenzene intoxication.
 However, before  the appearance of changes in the blood, there are earlier
 changes in  the central nervous system, as indicated by data obtained from
 the study of  the motor chronaxy of antagonist muscles, and of cholinester-
 ase of whole  blood.

     Apparently, by indirectly altering the processes of cellular metab-
 olism, nitrobenzene impairs the tissue respiration of the brain and of
 other internal organs, subsequently causing blood hypoxia as a result of
 the transformation of part of the hemoglobin into methemoglobin and
 sulfhemoglobin and of hemolysis of the erythrocytes.

     The ability of nitrobenzene during long-term penetration into the
 organism in concentrations of 0.8 and 0.08 mg/m^ to impair the vital
 functions of  cells of the central nervous system and the respiration of
 organs and  tissues, and to alter the state of the enzyme system in the
 blood of rats indicates that the action of the poison directly affects
 the "body chemistry" I. P. Pavlov always kept in mind, particularly when
 dealing with  the activity of the central nervous system, which he viewed
 as a function of the biochemical processes of the organism, while at the
 same time distinguishing its coordinating role in all the processes taking
 place in the  organism.

     In a hygienic evaluation of the pollution of the atmosphere with
 nitrobenzene  around an experimental plant that used this chemical as the
 raw material, we collected samples of atmospheric air during the spring-
 summer period of 1963.  The discharges of the plant studied contained
 vapors of nitrobenzene, nitrochlorobenzene and benzene.   In order to
 carry out a separate determination of these substances,  we developed a
 method of determination of nitrochlorobenzene with measurement on a
 spectrophotometer.

     The peak for the measurement of nitrochlorobenzene absorbed in dis-
 tilled water  (0.5 1/min)  was at a wavelength of 207-208 my with a slit
 opening of about 1.9.   The sensitivity of the method  was 0.25 yg per ml.

     Benzene was also measured on the spectrophotometer by using the
method of Alekseyeva et al.  (1963).   Nitrobenzene was determined colori-
metrically by Alekseyeva's method, as indicated above.

     We determined nitrobenzene in concentrations exceeding our proposed
highest single maximum permissible concentration (0.008 mg/m^)  at a
 distance of up to 200  m,  and in lower concentrations  at a distance of up
 to 300 m (Table 5).
                                    -.54 -

-------
                                               Table, 5

                 Pollution of Atmospheric Air with Nitrobenzene Around
                             One of the Plants.
Distance
From Source
of Discharge
150
200
250
270
300
Number -of
Samples
Collected
27
34
37
34
25
, Maximum
Nitrobenzene
Concentra-
tion) rng/m5'
0,0957
0,0'139
0.008 J,
0,0060
• Distribution of Concentra-
tions (mgj/m*) of nitro-
benzene in the samples
0.14 — 0.01
27
28 -
0.011-
0,003
1
1
Below
0.008
1
11
6
     Nitrochlorobenzene was  determined at  a distance of 100-300 m in con-
centrations  of 0.4-0.08 mg/mA   Benzene was not  observed in any of the
samples.

     Results of the  laboratory  studies were used by  the plant for the
introduction of changes in the  flowsheet of the  planned operations.
                                 Conclusions

     1.  Nitrobenzene has a high  toxic  activity which  injures  first the
central nervous system,  then the  blood.

     2.  On the basis of a study  of  the  threshold  of olfactory sensation
of nitrobenzene, the reflex effect of its  vapors on the  light  sensitivity
of the visual system and on the electrical activity of  the  brain,  we rec-
ommend that 0.008 mg/m3 be established  as  the highest  single maximum per-
missible concentration of nitrobenzene  in  the atmospheric air  of populated
areas.

     3.  A chronic action of nitrobenzene  vapors in concentrations of
0.8 and 0.08 mg/m^ caused an impairment  in the correct  ratio of chronaxies
of antagonist muscles, an increase in the  cholinesterase  activity  of whole
blood, a decrease in total hemoglobin and  oxyhemoglobin,  and an increase
of methemoglobin and sulfhemoglobin.

     '4.  As the average daily maximum permissible  concentration of nitro-
benzene in atmospheric air of populated  areas, we  propose the  concentration
of 0.008 mg/m3, which did not cause  any  significant changes during chronic
round-the-clock exposure.

     5.  Atmospheric air is contaminated with nitrobenzene  vapors  up to a
distance of 250 m around one of the  plants that use it  as the  raw  material.
                                     - 55 -

-------
                     LITERATURE CITED
          caa  M.  B.,  Kpu.ioBa  H. A.,   XpycTa.icna  B. A.
   Fur. H can.,  1963, N° 1, crp. 32.
• Ajibiicpn  J\.  E.  B/iiinime iicpniiofi  CIICTC.MU  na aKTimiiocib xo.imi-
   acTcpasiJ H xo.iiiiicprii'iccKyio pcaKumo Oo.ibitoro oprannsMa. B  KH.:
   CoupcMciiiibic  uonpocu iicpoiiaMa  D  tjwsiio.iormi H  namnoniH. MCA-
  . ni3. M.,  1958. crp. 45— -16.
B y tu T y c n .1  K. A. AlaTcpiia-nbi K ycTanon.ieiinio iipc,ae./iMio AOnycTii-
   MOM KoimeiiTpnumt asposo-nn  cepiiou KHOIOTU D atMoccjjepiiOM  BOS-
   Ayxe.  B  c6.: Hpc/icvibHO  AonycTiiMbie  KoimeiiTpamiii   atMOccpepiiux
   aarpnaiiciniM.    M..  1957,  u. Ill,   cip.  30—31;    I960.    D.  IV,
   crp. 94—96.      '  '
ByiiJTycna  K. A.,  no.noKacB  E. O.,   CCMCIICIIKO  A. Jl.
   Hayiciinc noporoa pecJMCKTOpiioro AeficiBiia  aiMOC(j)Cpiibix 3arpa;nic-'
   niifi MCTOAOM 3.ncKTpo3imc(J)ajiorpa4)iin.  fur.  n  can.,   1960, Ao  1,
   crp. 57—61.
P o <[> M c K J\ c p  B.  A. Marcpnaflbi  K  ooociiouaiiiiio npcjic^biio  Aony-
   CTiiMbix  KoiiUciiTpauiiii  aueTaron  B aT,\ioc(j)cpiiOM   B03Ayxc.  B  co.:
   ripCAC.nbiio  AonycniMbic  KoiinciiTpauim aTMOC<{>epiib!x  aarpnsiiciniii.
   M., 1961, B. V, crp. 156-159.
JlyOpoBCKan  O.  H.  riiriicinmccKaH  oneiihca sarpnaiiciinocTii aiMO-
   c(J.'epiioro no;tAyxa 6o;iL.tiioro ropoAa ccpiiiicrbiM  rasoM.  B c6.: flpe-
   ACjii.no AoiiycTHMbic KOiiucHTpamni  aiMoccpepiibix  aarpsisnciiiifi.  AV,
   1957,. B.  Ill,  crp. 46-51.
H M a iii e u a  H. D..  Tnr. n can.,  1963, A1* 2,  crp. 5.
Kasaisona   M. H. SKCiicpiiMeitTa.ibiiwe  ncc.iCAOBainin  K BOiipocy  o
   npcAc.nbiio AonycTii.Mbix- KoiiuciiTpaiuifix  iiiiTpoScnao.Ta  B  noAoeMax.
   AiiTopcij)Cp;iT. Hcp.Mb,  1954.
Ka n a ui n n K o n a   f. A.- B.innimc  Ma.nwx ^03 iniTpoCciiao^a na  cci;-
   pciopiiyiq cpyiiKiimo >i  7,  crp. 49—55.
Cy.'ia.MiiT 11. n Ap. Hcc.iCAOiiaiiiic TOKCII'ICCKOFO AciiCTRiin
   3o;ia.  B KII.:  KoiKpcpcimiin pyMbincKiix (Jjnsiio.ioroB Byxapccr,  I960,
   crp. 116—117.
Cy/ia.MiiT PI.  n  Ap.  apMai 11.1 n TO u n  B. H.  fur. 11  can., 1962, As  11, CTp. 4.
M >K a o   ll >tc n-it n.   A\aTCpnajTi>i   K 3KcncpiiMciiTa.ibiioMy ooocnoa.i-
   iiino npcAC.nbiio AonycTiiMoii KonuciiTpamin Meiaiio^a B  aTMoccjicpnoM
   D03Ayxc.  B  c6.:  ripCAC^ibiio AonycriiMHc KonneiiTpaumi   aT.MOC(l)Cp-
   iiux 3arpn3iiennfi. M.,  1961, n. V, crp.  101 — 105.
Laubcndcr  W., S c h w a rri b P.  Arch. exp. Pathol.  u. Pharnuik.,
   1951, Bd.  212, H. 5—6, S.  356—365.
G a u t i e r  G.  et  L a f o n J. Bull.  mem. Soc. med. Hop. Paris.,  1948,
   4, ser, v.  64, N. 3/4, p. 67—71.
Goldstein  J., Popovici C. Jgienea,  1958, v.  4, 309—318. .
                                  -  56  -

-------
   LOW CONCENTRATIONS OF UNSATURATED HYDROCARBONS OF THE ETHYLENE SERIES

                   IN AIR AROUND PETROCHEMICAL COMPLEXES
   Candidate of Medical Sciences M. L. Krasovitskaya and L. K. Malyarova
                     Ufa Institute of Hygiene and Professional Diseases

From "Biologicheskoe deystvie  i  gigienicheskoe znachenie atmosfernykh
zagryazneniy".  Pod  redaktsiey Prof.  V. A. Ryazanova i Prof. M. S. Gol'dberga.
Izdatel'stvo "Meditsina" Moskva, p. 74-100,  (1966).

     Thus far, hygienists have been working with the concept of the "sum"
of hydrocarbons, which includes  saturated, unsaturated, aromatic and chlor-
inated hydrocarbons.  Because  of the  great variety of hydrocarbons in atmos-
pheric air, the variability of their  composition and their diverse toxicity,
this overall definition excludes the  possibility of a hygienic evaluation
of their contents in the atmosphere.

     The object of the present study was to separate from the "sum" the
hydrocarbons of the ethylene series,  to establish their content in atmos-
pheric air, and to study the effect of low concentrations of ethylene,
propylene, and butylenes on man.  A hygienic evaluation of hydrocarbons of
the ethylene series is of particular  interest in areas with a large petroleum
refining and petrochemical industry polluting atmospheric air with unsatu-
rated hydrocarbons (cracking gas contains approximately 20-25% propylene,
up to 12-15% butylenes, 10-12% ethylene, 5-6% C5 hydrocarbons).

     Unsaturated hydrocarbons of the  ethylene series up to C^ inclusive
are gaseous substances, and those beginning with C5, liquids.  All these
hydrocarbons have a narcotic effect, which, however, is observed only at
high concentrations, on the order of several tens of volume percent.   The
strength of the effect increases with the number of carbon atoms.   In
addition to the narcotic effect, olefins, starting with butylenes, cause
an irritation of the respiratory tract.  The threshold of smell for butylene
(N. V.  Lazarev, 1954) is 0.59 mg/m^.  Compounds with branched chains had a
weaker effect than normal olefins.   According to the Gor'kiy Institute of
Labor Hygiene and Professional Diseases, the maximum permissible concen-
tration of olefin vapors in the plants is 50 mg/m3, and for butylenes, the
maximum permissible concentration is  100 mg/m3.

     In the literature available to us, there are no data on the effect of
low concentrations of individual hydrocarbons on the human organism and
its higher nervous activity.  Studies dealing with the action of hydrocarbons
on the human organism pertain to the sum of saturated and unsaturated hydro-
carbons and refer to concentrations existing in the air of industrial quar-
ters (R.  S.  Ostrovskaya, 1961; S. Kh. Nikolov, 1961; S. Kh. Karimova, 1961;
                                    - 57 -

-------
 R.  F.  Gabitova, 1960; B. A. Shekhtman,  1929,  1961, and others).  No  studies
 have been found dealing with the influence  of microconcentrations  of
 ethylene, propylene, and butylenes  on  the human or animal organism during
 administration by inhalation.

     The hygienic substantiation of the maximum permissible concentrations
 of  ethylenic hydrocarbons in the atmosphere consists in the experimental
 investigation of the effect of  low  concentrations of ethylene, propylene,
 and butylenes on the physiological  reactions  of the human organism.

     To  perform the experiment, propylene and butylenes were obtained  in
 the laboratory by dehydration of the corresponding alcohols - isopropyl
 and n-butyl alcohols - over active  aluminum oxide at 375-400°C.  (for pro-
 pylene)  and 350°C.  (for butylenes).  The alcohols were passed at a rate of
 800-900  ml per liter of catalyst per hour.   The purity of the gases  obtained
 was continually checked with a  KhT-2M  chromathermograph'.  The content  of
 pure gases varied between 95.5  and  99.5%.   The petroleum refinery  supplied
 ethylene of 99.9% purity.

     To  substantiate the highest single maximum permissible concentration,
 the olfactory threshold of these substances and the influence of their
 low concentrations  on the optical chronaxy  and dark adaptation were  deter-
 mined, and the threshold concentrations causing the formation of the
 electrocortical conditioned reflex  during inhalation were established.

     To  obtain constant concentrations  of the hydrocarbons studied,  use
was made of a method recommended by  the Committee on the Sanitary  Protec-
 tion of  Atmospheric Air.  The gaseous mixture for the experiment was ob-
 tained by mixing a  known concentration  of the gas studied with pure  air
 in  certain ratios.*  The two air streams were  controlled by stopcocks and
 checked  with flow meters.  The  actual gas content prior to the experiment
was determined with a titrimetric gas analyzer.   The constancy of  the
 concentration was checked for three  days for  each substance in the course
 of  4-6 hours (Table 1).

     In  eleven persons who showed no changes  in the olfactory organs,  the
 threshold of smell  for butylene, propylene, and ethylene was determined.
A total  of 536 observations were made.   Each  concentration was checked an
average  of three times.  The thresholds  of  olfactory sensation are given
in  Table 2.
    * The gas was dispensed with a stopcock.  A hermetically sealed cylinder was evacuated with a
vacuum purap to a certain reduced' pressure. The stopcock was rinsed with the substance being dispensed
and was then connected to the evacuated cylinder.  A certain volume of gas contained in the stopcock
was washed out with pure air until the pressure was equalized. The gas-air mixture obtained was
agitated by means of glass rods on a shaker.
                                      -  58 -

-------
                                                    Table 1

               Constancy of the Concentration in the Experimental Air Mixture.
Substance
Butylenes


Propylene


Ethylene


Days of
Observa.-
t.i on
1
2
' 3
1
2 •
3
1
2
3
Concentration in mg/rn? after 2 hours
3,12
' 2.16
3,71
5,0
2, OS
7,02
2.0
11,3
3,2-1
3,12
1,99
. 3,18
4,75'
2,6
6,75
2,0
11,6
3,2-1
3,18
1,92
3,64
4,68
2,15
7,25
2,5
11,3
3,18
3,18

3,64






      As  is evident  from Table  2,  the thresholds of olfactory sensation for
butylenes, propylene, and ethylene are similar:  in  the  most sensitive
persons  they amount to 15.A, 17.3 and 20 mg/m^ respectively.
                                                       Table 2


              Results of Determination of the Threshold of Olfactory Sensation
                         for Unsaturated Hydrocarbons (C2-C4)
Number of "
. Subjects 1
Minimum Perceptible
Concentration, mg/m3\
Imperceptible
Concentration, mg/m*
                     1
                     2
                     6
                     2
Ethylene

 20.0
 22,0
 26,3

Propylene

 17,3
 18,6  ..
 22,7
 24.0

Butylenes
 15.4
 17,3
 21,4
                                                        19,0
                                                        20,0
                                                        22,0
15,1
17,3
18,6
22,7
                                                        14,3
                                                        15.4
                                                        17,3
     The optical  chronaxy was  determined  in  3-4 subjects.   During  the
first  3-4 days, training of  the  subjects  was carried  out  for each  sub-
stance.   The rheobase and chronaxy were established six times with 3-minute
intervals during  the course  of the experiment.   After the  third measurement,
the subject was given a gas  of known concentration or pure air to  breathe.
                                       - 59  -

-------
 Three examinations were  made with each concentration.   The threshold for
 the determination of  the rheobase and chronaxy was  the  first sensation
 of phosphene.

      The results of the  study are listed in Tables  3, 4 and 5.

                                                  Table J>

                 Change of Optical Chronaxy'Before and After Inhalation  of Ethylene
                                (in percent at 0 minute).
Concentration,
mg/m3
Before Inhalation ''I
After Inhalation
Time of Experiment, minutes
0
3 6 |
9 | 12
15
                                   Subject Ye.
Pure Air •
9.6
13,9
19,0
100
100
100
100
- 101
101
101
100
101
101
101
101
102
102
67fc)
66(c)
101
103
100
68(c)
101
100
100
100
                                   Subject T.
Pure Air
9.6
13,9
19,0
100
100
100
100
100
98
100
102
98
98
101
99
98
98
101
129(b)
98
98
101
100
98
98
101
100.
                                   Subject R.
100
100
100
100
99
100
99
101
99
100
100
100
90
99
40(c)
134(a)
100 '
99
80(c).
125
99
99
100
94
                  Pure Air
                      9.6'
                     13.9
                     19,0
                 Note.. ^Confidence' factor-a - 95$, b - 99$, c - 99.9$.
     The  change of the rheobase was  noted in a study of the effect of
ethylene  in  a concentration of 19 mg/m^ in subject Ye.  In the  remain-
ing  cases,  the rheobase remained without changes.

     Thus,  the thresholds of the reflex effect of ethylene, propylene
and butylenes on the optical chronaxy  are at the same level and amount
to 13.9-14.3 mg/m3 (Fig. 1 and 2).   A  trace response during inhalation
of threshold concentrations occurred in the 12th minute during  the action
of propylene (subject G.) and ethylene  (subject T.).

     The  method of dark adaptation was  also used to establish the  thres-
hold of the  reflex effect of the hydrocarbons studied.

     The  examinations were conducted with an ADM adaptometer.   The dark
adaptation  curves  were obtained with three subjects for each substance
                                     - 60 -

-------
                                                    Table 4
              Change of Optical Chronaxy Before and After Inhalation of Propylene
                              (in percent.at 0 minute).
Concentration,!.
• mg/m5 •
Before
Inhal
jtion 1
• Time
0
1
3


of
6 '
After
Experiment
I •
1
j

Inhalation
minutes
12 I


15 .
                                 Subject Ye.
               Pure' Air
                    9,6
                 '  M.3
                   20.7
               Pure Air
                    9,6
                   M.3
                   20,7
               Pure Air
                    9.6
                   M,2
                   20,7
100
• 100
100
100
101
100
100
. 1GO
101
100
100
100
102 •
100
95(a)
7C(c).
101
101 •
100
. S9(b)
101
100
100
96
                                 Subject G.
100
100
100
IOC
100
100
100
100
99
100
100
100
99
100
163(c)
192(c)
99
101
118(a)
101
99
100
100
100
                                 Subject 0.
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
101
100
100
100
101
100
66,5(b)
139(c)
101
100
93
100
100
100
100
100
               Note:  Confidence factor:  a - 95$, b - 99$, c - 99.*•
studied.   During the first  few days, the subjects  were trained,  then the
initial  curve of dark adaptation was recorded  during inhalation  of pure
air.  Subsequently, a definite hydrocarbon  concentration was studied every
three days.   Results of  the  action of the substances studied on  the light
sensitivity  of the eye are shown in Table 6.

     Thus,  a concentration of  14 mg/m3 of ethylene, propylene, and buty-
lenes caused a change of the light sensitivity in  all the subjects.   In
two cases,  the action of this  concentration  caused a decrease of the
light sensitivity (in subject  G. during inhalation of propylene  and in
subject  M.  under the influence of butylenes).   In  the remaining  cases,
a rise of  the dark adaptation  curve was noted  (Fig. 3).  The 11  mg/m^ con-
centration  did not act on all  of the subjects  either.  Thus, the threshold
of the reflex effect of  the  hydrocarbons studied on the course of the dark
adaptation  curve lies below  the threshold of smell and amounts to 11 mg/rn^.
The 8 mg/m3  concentration was  found inactive for all the hydrocarbons studied.
The next stage of our study  was the determination  of the action  of ethylene,
propylene,  and butylenes on  the development  of the electrocortical con-
ditioned reflex.*
    * The"electrical activity of the brain was studied in collaboration with Yu. A. Terekhov. and
 K.' I. Sukhotina, members of the scientific staff of the physiology laboratory.
                                     - 61'-

-------
                                                                 Table 5

             Change- of Optical Chrpnaxy Before and After Inhalation of Butylenes
                                  'in percent at 0 minute).
               Concentration,
                                Before Inhalation
                                                          After Inhalatipn
                                         Time of Experiment, minutes
                                                                 12
Subject Ye.
fture Air
10,4
14,0
20,0
100
100
100
100
101
100
99
100
101
99
100
100
102
99
71 (a)
52(c)
101
100
99
93
101
100
100
99
Subject G.
Pure Air
10,4
' 14,0
20,0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
99
100
100
100
99
100
1 10(c)
1 2 1 (b)
99
100
100
105
99
102
100
100
Subject 0.
Pure Air
10,4
. 14,0
20,0
100
100
100
100
100
101
99
. 100
101
102
100
100
101
102
16'l(c)
lG5(c)
101
102 •
100
100
100
99
100
100
Subject R.
Pure Air
. .10,4
14,0
•. 20,0
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
101
100
100
103
100
150(a)
147(h)
100
100 ..
• 100
100
100
101
100
. 100
               Note.   Confidence  Factor:   a - 95$, b - 99$, c - 99.9$.
     ftf
  100-
>>  sol
    7ff-
\\         /:
\\      , //

 \\     //

 \\//»
  V  v'  •
                                              Fig. 1.  Change of optical chronaxy
                                              during inhalation of butylenes in
                                              subject Ye.
                                              1 - pure air; 2 - concentration of
                                              butylenes. 10.4 mg/m5; 3-14 ng/m5;
                                              4-20 mg/m5.
D.
o
    60-
                       V
            J     6.    9
              Time, minutes
                                             -  62  -

-------
      The examinations were made on a 2-channel encephalograph of domestic
manufacture  using  the method  of Bushtuyeva,  Polezhayev and  Semenenko
(1960).   Results of the  determination  of the threshold of"influence of
the  hydrocarbons on the  electrical activity  of the brain are given in
Table 7.
A
uo-
HO-
no-
100-
so-
30-
70-
60-
50-
6
F
" 1 NV
_«=.•=.-«=,*_-»/ . ,_] 	 ,\ ,
\ ^ f\
\ ' /
\ /
\ i
\ !
\ '•
. \i
3 6 3 12 IS
Time, minutes
                                                 Fig-. 2.  Change of optical chronaxy
                                                 during inhalation of ethylene in
                                                 subject T.
                                                 1 - pure air;  2 - ethylene concentra-
                                                 tion |9.6 mg/m5; 3 - 13.9 mg/m3;
                                                           't  - 19 ns/m3.
                                                         Table 6

                 Average Values  of Light Sensitivity of the Eye During Inhalation of
                 Different Concentrations of Hydrocarbons of the Ethylene Series
                                     in Percent of 15th Minute.
Subject
20th Minute
- Pure
Air
Concentration, mg/m'
u.o
11.0
8,0
25th Minute
Pure
Air •
Concentration, mg/m3
14.0
n.o .
8.0
                                          Ethylsne
                  .G.
                  M.
                  G.
                  M.,
                  D.
                         161
                         116
                         129
161
HG
129
161
146
124
252(a)
288(a)
            182(b)
            126
156
148
129
191
221
149
29G(c)
239
214(b)
                                          Propylene
lO-l(c)
234 (c)
215(c)
156
199(b)
153
152
135
192
221
149
100(b)
190(a)
193(a)
Butyle-nes
234(c)
120(b)
150(b)
187(b)
175(b)
121
158
152
129
192
221
177
265(b)
1 G5(c)
130(c)
210(a)
244   i
155
                  25S(c)
                  230
                  220(a)
                  237(c)
                  23-1 (c)
                  166
201
238
140
        ISO
        213
        154
         205
         204
         177
                 Note.  Confidence Factor:  a - 95%; b - 99%;  c - 99.9%.
                                          - 63  -

-------
   wo]

   350

   JOO-
•r!  100\
  •150
   so-
      8  5  .10  15  20 25 30

            Time, minutes

-------
      The  conditioned  reflex was usually developed at  the 4-9th pairing,
more  seldom at  the 11-14 th.   The threshold of reflex  change  of the
electrical  activity of  the brain lies at  the level of  4.4 mg/m^ for all
the  gases  (Fig.  4, 5).   Combined data from the study  of the  reflex  effect
of ethylene, propylene,  and butylene  on the receptors  of the respiratory
organs are  listed in  Table 8.
                                                           Table 8
                Threshold Concentrations of Ethylene, Propylene and Butylenes
                        Acting on Receptors of Respiratory Organs.
Threshold '
'Sensation of smell
Effects on electrical excitability
.- (optical chronaxy)
Effects on light sensitivity
Effects onielectrical activity of
the brain.
Fhresbcld Concent-rations, mg/m^
Ethylene
20.0
13,9
11,0
4,4
Propylene
17,3
14,2
11,0
4,4
Butylenes
15.4
M,0
11.0
4.4
              ' A^$$|^^
                        •'A11                             '
              * Ajfej^1/ %...;fo&^^
              Fig. 4.  Electroencephalogram of subject M.  Conditioned-reflex desynchron-
              ization occurred during inhalation of propylene in 4.4 mg/ra5 concentration
              (at 7th, pairing).
              1 - electroencephalogram of the left occipital area; 2 - right occipital
              area; a - mark indicating when light was turned on; B - mark indicating
                                       supply of gas.
                                      -  65 -

-------
                        *^ty^^


                        *,«rf$tyV*,Vft^
             Fig. 5. Electroencephalogram for Subject M.  No conditioned-reflex desyji-
             chronization occurred during inhalation of propylene in 3.3 mg/m3 concen-
             tration (19th pairing).
                               Notation same as in Fig. k.
      The results  obtained made  it  possible to propose 3 mg/m.3  as  the
highest single maximum permissible concentration  of ethylene,  propylenes,
and  butylenes.

      In view of the  fact that the  hydrocarbons which we studied are
constantly present in the atmosphere,  the threshold of their effect on the
electrical activity  of the brain was  determined for their combined presence
(Table 9).
                                                      Table 9

             Combined Action of Ethylene, Propylene,  and Butylenes on the
               Development of the Electrocortical Conditioned Reflex.
C on cent rst ions of
ethylene + propyl-
er.-a + butylenes,
mg/m*

1.1-rl. 1 + 1,1
2, H- 1,1-1- 1,1
1,1-1-2,1-1-1,3
l.H-1, 1-1-2,1
. 3.2 + 3,3+3.2
Total con-
centration
in fractions
of maximum
permissible
value
1,0",
. -1,3
1.3
1,3
3.0
Subject


M.

_
' +
+
+
+•


A.


+• ••
+
•^
+
_

K.

'•

-------
mixture.  Each  series involved five groups of 15 white male rats  each
 (Table 10).



       Fig. 6.  Electroencephalogram of subject If. No conditioned reflex desynchronization of
       the rhythm occurred during inhalation of ethylene, propylene, and butylenes (total con-
       centration in fractions of maximum permissible value equal to unity) (l5th pairing).
                             Notation same as^in Fig. 4.
         i$^M^®A^
                                 ifpwv^

                                        •8
         Fig. 7.  Electroencephalogram of subject M. Conditioned-reflex desynchronization of the
         rhythm during inhalation of ethylene, propylene and butylenes (total concentration inJ
         fractions of maximum permissible value equal to 1.3) (llth pairing).
                               Notation same as in Fig. 4.

                o
     The 3 mg/m   concentration  is the highest single  maximum permissible
concentration  that we are proposing, and  100 mg/m3 is  the maximum per-
missible concentration of butylene in the  air of industrial quarters.

     The exposure of each series  of animals  lasted 70  days.

     'The gases for the experiment were prepared and their purity  was
checked in the same manner as in  the first part of the study.  The obser-
vations were made by using the  following  tests:  weight and behavior of
the  animal, ratio of the chronaxies of antagonist muscles, blood  pressure,
number of blood leucocytes and  their phagocytic activity, whole blood
                                      - 67 -

-------
 cholinesterase, and  fluorescent* microscopy of leucocytes.

                                                     Table 10

                   Concentrations of Substances Studied in the Chambers,

Series




I





11



Concentra-
tion

Assumed
Actual

Concentra-
tion

Assumed
Actual

Concentrate [in, mj/m^
First Second
Group 1 . GrouP
(Butyl- i(Propy^-
enes) '1 ene;




100,0
104,3 +
1.0



13.0
3,12 +
0,02




100,0
103, 1±
1.3



3.0
3,13 +
0,02
Third
Gr.oup
(Eihyl-
ene)




100,0
104,1 +
0,7



3,0
3,18±
0,03
Fourth
Group (mix-
ture of eth-
ylene, pro-
pylene and_
Dutyienes)


33.»,of

103.1 +0.5
^


1.0 of each
Ctotal of
3.12 + 0.02

Fifth
Group
(control)




i °
0,24+0,1




: 0
0

     The  animals in each chamber were  divided into two subgroups:   the ratio
of chronaxies  of antagonist muscles  and the blood pressure were  determined
in the  first  group (8 rats), whereas in the second (7 rats),  the number of
leucocytes, their phagocytic activity,  and whole blood cholinesterase were
determined  and fluorescent analysis  of  the leucocytes was performed.   At the
end of  the  exposures, some of the  animals  of each group were  given  the
"swimming test", and the remaining ones were sacrificed.  The organs  of the
sacrificed  animals were then subjected  to  histopathological analysis.   The
choice  of the  above methods was determined by the nature of the  action of
the substances studied (narcotics) .

     The  ratio of chronaxies of antagonist muscles is the most sensitive
test reflecting the functional shifts in the central nervous  system.   The
present day understanding of the physiological essence of chronaxy has per-
mitted  the  use of chronaximetry as a method for the investigation of  the
functional  state of the nervous system  in  the study of the chronic action
of low  concentrations for the standardization of atmospheric  pollutants
(V. P.  Melekhina,  1962; V.  A. Gofmekler, 1961,  and others).
     *Editor's note:  For the Russian use of" the terms "luminescept" and "luminescence" in this paper,
 we have substituted "fluorescent" and "fluorescence", on tha basis of the definitions of these terms.
                                    - 68 -

-------
     Cholinesterase.  The physiological role of cholinesterase is closely
related to the activity of the central nervous system.  The mechanism of
action of narcotics on the central nervous system may be attributed to an
impairment of the processes of chemical transfer of stimulation in the
brain synapses.  Judging from the investigations of M. Ya. Mikhel'son,
the inhibition of cholinesterase by the narcotic plays an important part
in the mechanism of nerve-type narcosis in the broadly accepted cholinergic
mechanism of synaptic transfer of nerve impulses.  According to this
author's data, with certain ratios of the enzyme to acetylcholine, narcotic
concentrations of various substances decrease the cholinesterase activity
by 50-70%.  A parallelism has been established between the strength of
action of 16 different narcotics and their concentrations, which depress
cholinesterase to the same extent (N. V. Lazarev, 1961).

     Blood Pressure.  The hypotensive action of hydrocarbons has been
established by numerous authors in experiments on animals and clinical
observations of people in contact with these substances under industrial
conditions (R. F. Gabitova, 1960; Z. Sh. Zagidullin, 1960; R. S. Ostrovskaya,
1961; L. I. Geller et al. , 1963, and others).

     Our observations of animals (white rats) exposed to natural conditions
in the immediate vicinity of petroleum refineries (1963) established a
statistically reliable lower level of blood pressure in rats of this group
as compared with the control (in the 13-17th week of the experiment).

     A considerably larger (by a factor of 2-1/2 - 6) number of cases  of
hypotonia occurs in children who have lived for 5 years in the vicinity of
petroleum refineries, as compared with the control group.

     Phagocytic activity.  The literature contains indications of a decrease
of immunobiological activity under the influence of the gas factor (A. N.
Volkova, 1959; P. A. Zhilova, 1959;  D.  G. Pel'ts, 1960).

     A decrease in the phagocytic activity of the blood under the influence
of atmospheric pollutants has been noted by E. A. Sarkisyants (1959),
M. L. Krasovitskaya, L. K.  Malyarova, and T. S.  Zaporozhets (1963).

     Fluorescent microscopy is one of the methods for determining early
quantitative and qualitative changes of the formed elements of white blood
corpuscles.  The use of this method is based on the ability of nucleic acid
to exhibit fluorescence on combining with the fluorochromes of the acridine
series:  the nuclear nucleoproteins  of degenerating cells combine with
acridine dyes differently than do the nucleoproteins of uninjured cells, as
is reflected in the character of their fluorescence (M. P. Meysel' 'and
V. A. Sondak, 1956).

     Normally, the nuclei of white cells fluoresce with an emerald-green
color.   When the synthesis is disturbed, and there is depolymerization of
                                   -- 69 -

-------
the nuclear  deoxyribonucleic  acid,  the  nuclei begin to flucresce with a
red or orange  color.   The  method of fluorescent microscopy of white blood
corpuscles for the  evaluation of the effect of low concentrations of chem-
ical substances was  first  used by A. D.  Semenenko at the department of
communal hygiene  of the  Central Institute for Advanced Training of Physi-
cians .

     Fluorescent  microscopy was successfully used by M. I. Gusev and
K. N. Chelikanov  (1963)  in the study of amylene in chronic experiments on
animals.

     The "swimming"  test for  endurance  (adapted for toxicology by M. I.
Rylova, 1959)  was used in  our studies because it involved the mobilization
of all the resources of  the organism.   This in our view should be an
integral indicator.  During our previous  investigations on animals under
natural conditions,  this test yielded demonstrative results.

     During  the entire course of the two  series of exposures, all the rats
were healthy and  active, and  their  behavior did not differ from that of
the controls.  Starting  on the 48th day  of exposure, all the  animals re-
ceived a scorbutigenic diet for ten days.   A statistically reliable weight
decrease was then observed in rats  of the first and second groups in the
first series of experiments.   At the end  of the exposures, the weight of
all the animals was  at the same level.

     Measurements of the chronaxies of  antagonist muscles were made by
means of an ISE-01 electronic pulse stimualtor.   The chronaxy was deter-
mined in eight rats  of each group under identical conditions  and at the
same time.   The character  of  the change in the ratio of the chronaxies
of antagonist muscles  over the course of  the exposures is shown in Tables
11 and 12.
                                                   Table 11
               Ratio of Chronaxies of Antagonist Muscles in Rats of Series I.


Grotip
•First

Second

Xhird

Fourth

" Fifth '

Before
Exposure
1,7±0,15

1,9+0, M

1.6±0,I4

1,7 + 0,1.5

I,6±0.15
Day of Experiment

17th
l,5±0.1(b)

I.G±0,23

2.0±0,25

2.0±0,2S

2,0+1.2

35th
0.9 + 0.22(b)

1.3±0,31(a)

l,2±0,2S(a)

!,-l±0,12(a)

2,3+0,28

52nd
1,0 +
0,!7(b)
1.0+
0,2'l(a)
1.1+0,25

1,1+0,26

1,6+0,1

68th
0,7-1-
0,13(c)
1,0±
0,09(c)
0,9±
0,13(c)
0.9 +
O.ll(c)
1,6±0.02
                Note.  Confidence factor:  a - 95$; b - 99#5 c - 99«9#.
                                    - 70 -

-------
P.OS
fl.pt-
0.0J-
0,0?-
0,01-
               //    J5    i?
                  Days  of
    Exposure      Exposure
   Jo
Before
 Fig.- 8.  Motor chronaxy of antag-
 onist muscles in  rats of series I.
 I, II, III,  IV, V - exposure groups;
 solid line denotes the chronaxy of
 extensors, dashed line, that of flexors;
 AB - period  of exposure.
                                                           ff.M-
                                                           O.SJ-
                                                           0,0!-
                                                           P.OI-
                                                                0.03-
                                                                0.0?-
                                                                0.01-
                                                              o
                                                              Si
                                                              \ff.ffj-
                                                              $0,0?-
                                                             '•%O.OI-
                                                                    \
0.03:
0,0?
0,01-
O.OJ-
0,0?
e.st-

w
f~-

7 -^

Jo
Before
Exposur
x^^^
,*••"""""" — — ^^

f • t

IS Ji J? (
Days of
5 Exposure
Fig. 9.  Motor  chronaxy of
antagonist muscles  in  rats
of series II.
Notation same as  in Fig.  8.
                                             -  71  -

-------
      In the course of the exposure, the  ratios  of  the chronaxies of
 flexors and extensors in experimental rats  of series  I underwent a change:
 over  the course of the experiment, these indicators were found to converge,
 and toward the end of the exposure their inverse ratio was established in
 the first, third,  and fourth groups.  In rats of the  second group, the
 chronaxies of the  flexors and extensors were found to be equal toward the
 end of  the experiment.

                                                    Table 12
                Ratios of Chronaxies of Antagonist Muscles in Rats of Series II.


Group
First
Second
Third
Fourth •
Fifth

Before
Exposure
1.4-1-0.3
1.35 + 0,15
1.6±0,3
1,3 + 0.29
1,5 + 0.22
Day of Experiment

ITtti -
1,2 + 0.2
1,3+0,18
1.4 + 0.1
1,8±0,11
1,3-1-0,14

35th
1.4±0,15
I,9±0.11
1,4±0,18
1,6±0.11
1,3±0,15

52nd
1,2 + 0, IS
1,5±0,15
1,4 + 0.13
1,3±0,1
1,6 ±0.08

68th
l.C + 0.1
1, -1 + 0, 18
1,4±0.15
1,3+0.1
1,6+0,1
     In  the  control  rats,  the ratio of chronaxies of  antagonist muscles
did not  change  substantially during the course of the  experiment and
ranged from  1.6  to 2.3.   In rats of all the groups  of  series  II, the
ratios of  chronaxies of  antagonist muscles remained within  the limits of
the physiological norm.

     The difference  in  the changes of the rheobase  of  the extensors and
flexors was  insignificant, i.e., statistically unreliable in  all the groups,
The chronaxy of  antagonist muscles in rats of series I  according to groups
is shown in  Fig. 8.

     The blood pressure  was determined in eight rats of each  group before
and during exposure  under  identical experimental conditions,  using the
method of Martynova  (1956).  Results of the investigations  are given in
Tables 13  and 14.
                                                        Table  13
                        Level of Blood Pressure in Rats of Series I.
Group
-First
Second
Third
Fourth
Fifth
Before
Exposure
100 + 3,0
10-! + -!, 2
10-1 + 3,0
105+1,4
102±2,1
•Day of Experiment
18th
98±1,7
99+1,2
GO + 2,1
90+3.0
104 ±5,9
35th
97 + 3,4
99+14,0
S8+4,2(a)
88+3, 6(a)
103±4.4
52nd
85 + 3, l(b) '
90 + 2, i(a)
8S±2,l(b)
S4 + 2,3(c)
98±0,C
69th' '
7Cf3,5(c)
S0+3,5(b)
7Gj-2,l(b)
79 + 3, 3(b)
98+2,9
               Note. Confidence factor:  a - 95$; b - 99$; c - 99.9$.
                                    -_72  -

-------
                                                      Table 14

                         Blood Pressure Level in Rats of-Series II,
Group
First
Second
Third .
Fourth
Fifth
Before
Exposure
103 -i- 1,2
105+1,2
I0-l±l,2
106±0,9
106+1,3
Day of Experiment
18th
107+1,9
104±1,3
107±1,4
105±1,3
107±1,5
35th
109 ±1,8
106+0,9
105 + 0,8
110 + 2,0
103±1,5
52nd
10C + 2.8
109 + 2,1
10G + 0.9
109±1,7
108±3,4
68th
lOGi-1,1
101+1,5
106+1,4
106+1,4
10S±1.1
      The blood pressure in rats of series  I  before exposure and in the
 first two weeks did not appreciably differ from that of the controls.
 From the middle of the exposure time,  a  statistically reliable decrease
 was  noted in the third and fourth groups.  From the 52nd day of the exper-
 iment,  the change of this indicator was  already established in all the
 animals  of this series.  The blood pressure  level in the control was with-
 in  the  limits  of physiological norm over the entire course of the experiment.

      In  rats of series II, the blood pressure level in all the groups (both
 experimental and control) was the same and corresponded to the physiological
 norm during the entire period of observations.

      To  study  the activity of whole blood  cholinesterase,  we used a
 potentiometric method of determination (M. I.  Goshev,  1958)  modified by
 Dmitriyeva.   The results obtained are given  in  Tables  15 and 16.

                                                      Table 15
                   Activity of Cholinesterase of Whole Blood in Rats of Series I
                               (.in Hicromoles of CH^OOH).
Group
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Fifth
Before
Exposure
2,19 + 0,21
2,30 + 0,37
2,01 ±0,19
2,63-1:0,3
2,35 ±0,35
Dav of Experiment
19th
2,81 ±0,22
2,35-1:0,23
1,92.10,21
2,5G±0,27
2,51 ±0,34
36th
1,84 + 0,25
2,02 + 0,13
1,82 + 0,09
2,09±0,19
2,2 +0,13
53rd
l,51±0,09(c)
2,01±0,1
l,70 + 0,09(c)
2,0 + 0,15
2,32±0,3
70th
l,32±0,04(c)
2,01+0,09
l,5-1.0,l(c)
l,77±0,07(c)
2,1±0,01
                 Note. Confidence factor:  a - 95%, b - 99$, c - 99.c
     Thus, in series  I  of the experiment, the enzymatic  activity  of the
blood before exposure and during the first half of the experiment was main-
tained at the same  level in the animals of the five groups.   A statistically
reliable depression  of  cholinesterase activity was observed  on the 53rd day
of exposure in  rats  of  the first and third groups.  At the end of the experi-
ment, a statistically reliable decrease of cholinesterase activity as com-
pared with the  control  was observed in rats of the first, third and fourth
groups.
                                     - 73 -

-------
                                                 Table 16
                Activity of Whole Blood Cholinesterase in Rats of Series II
                           (in Micrqmoles of CH£OOH).
Group
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Fifth
Before
Exposure
2,3±0,15
1,8+0,007
1,8G±0,007
1,92±0,007
1,98±0,15
Day of Experiment
19th
2,20 ±0,20
1,72 ±0,08
1,83 + 0,10
1,96 ±0,07
1,97+0,20
37th
2,28+0,18
1,66±0,10
1.73 + 0,10
1,97+0,11
2,03±0,12
53rd
2,15 + 0,18
1,75±0,11
1,77+0,19
1,99±0,10
2,09±0,13
70th
2,08 + 0,17
1,82 + 0,08
1,83±0,09
2,0 +0,09
2,11±0,1G
     No statistically  reliable  difference  in  cholinesterase activity was
established in experiments  of series  II  as compared with  the control.

     The  leucocytes were  counted by the  standard  method.   No statistically
reliable  difference in  the  number  of  leucocytes was established during the
course of the experiments in any of the  rats  of series  I  and II as com-
pared with the control.

     In the determination of the phagocytic activity of the blood (D. G.
Pel'ts, 1954), the percentage of phagocytizing neutrophiles and the
phagocytic number were  taken into  account.  In series I of the  experiments,
two reliable results were obtained in the  study of  phagocytic activity:
in rats of the second  group  (growth of the phagocytic number on the 19th
day of exposure) and of the  first, second  and third groups (on  the 36th
day).  No changes of the phagocytic number and percentage  of phagocytizing
neutrophiles were observed in animals  of series II.

     In the fluorescent microscopy of white blood cells, no differences in
the content of leucocytes whose nuclei had an orange color were observed
between rats of the experimental and  control  groups of  both series.

     The "swimming" test was conducted after  completion of the  exposure.

     No reliable differences were established in  the duration of swimming
in rats of all the groups.  The indicator  of  this test  within each group
was marked by a great variability.

     No pathologic changes in the internal organs were  observed in the
autopsy of animals of series I  and II.

     Thus, the studied exposure to ethylene,  propylene, butylenes, and a
combination of these substances showed that a concentration of  3 mg/m^ of
each of these gases and their mixture  is inactive under chronic experimental
conditions and can be recommended as  the average  daily  maximum  permissible value.
                                     -  74  -

-------
      To determine the hydrocarbons in  atmospheric  air,  a method of hydro-
 carbon analysis developed in the laboratory  and  involving the use of a
 KhT-2M chromathermograph was employed.

      The developed method made it possible to establish the  actual content
 of unsaturated hydrocarbons in atmospheric air.  The  samples  were collected
 within a 2.5 km radius of petroleum refineries.  Single and  average daily
 concentrations were determined.  A total of  140  analyses  were performed.
 The results are shown in Table 17.
                                                    Table 17

              Pollution of Atmospheric Air vdth Unsaturated Hydrocarbons Within
                      a 2.5 km Radius from Petroleum Refineries.
•frydrooarbons
Ethylene
Propylene
Butylene
Araylenes
Concentrations, ng/m5
Single
Maximum
-1,97
3.5
4,15
3,68
Average
2,31
1,37
2,43
2,13
Average Daily
Maximum
2,37
1,60
1,08
1.97
     Thus,  the  highest  single concentrations of each of the hydrocarbons
which we  determined at  the indicated distance are slightly higher  than
the maximum permissible concentrations.   The highest content of hydro-
carbons when present  together exceeds the proposed maximum permissible
value severalfold.
                                 Conclusions

     1.  The hydrocarbon  gases  ethylene, propylene, and butylene have
similar  thresholds  of  olfactory sensation and thresholds of reflex effect
on the human organism.

     The threshold  of  smell  for butylenes,  propylene, and ethylene for
the most sensitive  persons amounts  to  15.4, 17.3 and 20 mg/m^ respectively.

     The threshold  of  reflex effect determined by the method of chronaxi-
metry was 13.9-14.2 mg/m3.

     The threshold  of  the effect on the  reflex change of the light sensi-
tivity of the eye was  11 mg/m3.
                                     -  75  -

-------
     The  threshold  concentration causing the formation of the electro-
 cortical  conditioned reflex was found to be 4.4 mg/m3.  The maximum
 inactive  concentration was 3.3 mg/m^.

     2.   The maximum permissible concentrations of unsaturated hydrocarbons
 of  the ethylene series should lie below the threshold of olfactory sen-
 sation, the thresholds of their action on the electrical excitability
 and  light sensitivity of the eye, and also below the threshold of formation
 of  the electrocortical conditioned reflex.

     In this connection, the highest single maximum permissible concentra-
 tion in atmospheric air which can be recommended is 3 mg/m3 for ethylene,
 propylene, and butylene.

     3.   During the combined action of ethylene, propylene and butylenes,
 a simple summation of the effect of these substances is observed.  The
 combined  action of these hydrocarbons in concentrations equal to the pro-
 posed maximum single values causes a change in the electrical activity of
 the brain.  Similar changes were obtained in all combinations of these
 substances at which their sum exceeded the proposed maximum permissible
 concentration (3 mg/m^).

     The highest single maximum permissible concentration for hydrocarbon
 gases of  the ethylene series when present together should be 3 mg/m^.

     4.  The hydrocarbon gases - ethylene, propylene, and butylenes - in a
 concentration of 100 mg/m3 during chronic, round-the-clock action on animals
 cause changes in the functional state of the central nervous system, i.e.,
 an impairment of the subordinate influence on the chronaxy of antagonist
muscles, depress the cholinesterase activity, and have a marked hypotensive
effect.

     During the exposure, the number of leucocytes did not change, and there
were no differences in the content of leucocytes, whose nuclei were orange
in color.   Changes in the phagocytic activity of the blood were not regular
in character and cannot therefore be correlated with the action of the
hydrocarbons.

     The duration of swimming of the rats in all the experimental groups
was much shorter than in the control, but the great scatter of this indi-
cator within the group has led to a statistical unreliability of these
results.

     5.  Ethylene, propylene, and butylenes in concentration of 100 mg/m^
under conditions of a chronic experiment have the same strength of action
on the organism.  The existing fluctuations in the strength of action of
these substances are not distinctly expressed in the various tests and are
                                   -  76 -

-------
therefore  attributed to  the individual sensitivity  of the  experimental
animals.


      6.  During  the combined action of ethylene, propylene,  and butylenes,
a  simple summation of the action of these substances  is observed  in a
chronic experiment.  Changes in  the animals  during  the isolated action
of ethylene,  propylene,  and butylenes  in concentration of  100 mg/m3 of  each
substance  were analogous  to the  changes taking place  during  exposure to a
combination of these substances  with  the same  total concentration.


      7.  Exposure  of the  animals to the hydrocarbons  in concentration of
3  mg/m^ has no effect on  the behavior  and weight of the animals,  on the
blood pressure level and  ratio of the  chronaxies of the antagonist  muscles,
on the cholinesterase activity,  or on  the number and  phagocytic activity
of leucocytes, does not  injure the nuclear nucleoproteins  (according to
the  data of fluorescent microscopy),  and is  not reflected  in the  results
of the "swimming"  test.


      8.  The  highest single maximum permissible concentration of  these
hydrocarbon gases  which we are proposing, 3  mg/nP,  is inactive in a
chronic experiment and can also  be recommended as the average daily con-
centration.
                               LITERATURE CITED
              A.ncKcccna  M. B. OupCAe.iciiiic aT.MOCcliepiibix 3arpH3i[ciiHH. Mc;t-
                •ma, M., 1903, crp. 122—126.
              B y in T y c B a I\. A., Fl o .1 c >K a c D  E. d>.,   CCMCIICIIXO A. R.
                Fur. it can., 1900, As I, cip. 57—01.
              B y in T y c u a K. A., Ilo.ic/Knco  E. .,   CCMCIICKKO A. fl.
                0II3H0.1. wypn. CCCP, 1900, T. 4, crp. 452—457.
              Bo.iKoua  A. !•!. Fur. u can., 1959, j\» 1, cip. 80—32.
              T a O.n Ton a  P. (1). MaTcpiia.ib;  K H3yi;cmiio xponii'iecKoii miTOKCiixa-
                iinn npoAyKT.T.Mii MMoroccpniicToii iie(J)Tii.  B Co.: Fiinicun  rpjvia  n
                o.xpana 3Aopoiibsi  pr.Oo'inx  i:c(l)Tnnoi'[ u  ne<[iTexiiM!i'iccKpf!  npouuui-
                .ICMIIOCTII. Vc|)a, 1960, T. I, crp. 107—127.
              Fc/i.ncp'Jl. H.,  13 c.i o M u TUC u  5.
                crp. 3—8.
                                          -- 77 -

-------
 ,U c M c i; T i, c r, a At. H.  Aiin.nna  yr.ncBOAOpo.T.iiw.x rasou.  M.— JI.,  foe-
   TOMTCXII3A.1T,  1S59.
 >Kii.ion a H. A. fur. i; can., 1959, M-  12, cyp.  18—23.
 3 a r n A y .'i •'! n ii  3. HI.  B/innniic GauimipcKiix copiiiicri-ix iic;pTcii   i;a
   cppAC'iiio-coeyAiicTyio cucrcMy paoo'iiix, saiinibix Ha  AOOUMC  n  nope-
   P.IUOTKC iix.  Ii c6.:  rimicua  rpy.ia n  oxpaiia  j.iopom.K  pnoo'inx v,
   llCtjmmofl  H  ]!CCj>TCXI!Mll'lQC!;Oli  MpOMbllU.'iCIIHOCTM.   Vt^a,  I9GO,  T.  1.
   crp. 139—151.
 K ;i  p n M o » a  A. X. Cocroniinc  iicpiuiofi ciicic.Mbi n noKovopwc   duo-
   xiiMii'iccKiic  noKci3aTC.'i:-i  y paGo'iiix, aannrux ri npoii3iio;icTne cirnv-
   Tii'ieckoro  cnnpT.'i. B KII.: Ata-repiia.ni,i  iiayiiioii  nOii(|>cpcii!ini!, nocrsn-
   ui.c;ino}"i  i;ciipociiM niriiciiu  rpy/'ia,  iipo([)ccci!oiia.iiiuoii  n.Tro.rio"iiii i!
   iipo.M[.iiLi.'iciiiioii  TOKciiKo.ionn:  n  iicf|n-jnioii  n  nc(|)Tc\iiMi:'iVcii<  c u  T. C.,  C o u o .1 c n  A. C.
   XpoM:iTorpai|)ii>iccKiiii  MCTO;I  pan.iCJii.iioro  o:ipc;ic.iciuiti  yr.neno;iopo-
   AOII u noxiyxc.  1'iir.  n can., l'.)G2, A\> 7, crp. 27—32.

 K p a c o n ii u K ;i n  M. ,'!., A\ a A n p o n n  Jl. K., 3 a n o |> o >K c n  T.  C.
   riinic'iiM'iccKnji onciiiwi jiirpimiciiiiM  aT.Moc(J)Cjnioro  no3/iyxa i)i,iupo-
   ca.Mii iiciliTcct'popai'aTiJuaioiniix- n  XII.MIIMCCKIIX  npc/uipmmu'i.  A\;ITC-
   pii:i.'ii,i  pcciiyu.niii!3iiciiiiii. B cO.:  npc/ic-nwio AOiiycTii.Mi.ic KoiiuciiTpauiiii
   aTMOC(Jicpiiux 3arp>i3iicinu"i. Mc;ini3,  19G2, ». VI.
 M n K o.i oo  C. X.  K  nonpocy o xpoiui'iccKOM uosACiicrnini yr.nciio.io-
   poAOH na oprani!3M lie.TOue;
-------
                  THRESHOLD CONCENTRATIONS  OF  ACETOPHENONE

                   DURING SHORT- AND LONG-TERM INHALATION


                            Candidate of Medical Sciences
                               N. B. Imasheva
            Department of Communal Hygiene, Central Institute for Advanced Training of
            Physicians,  and Department of General Hygiene, Kuybyshev Medical Institute

From "Biologicheskoe deystvie  i  gigienicheskoe znachenie  atmosfernykh
zagryazneniy".  Pod  redaktsiey Prof. V.  A.  Ryazanova i  Prof.  M.  S.  Gol'dberga.
Izdatel'stvo "Meditsina" Moskva, p. 101-118, (1966).

     A rapid industrial development is  associated  with  the discharge into
atmospheric air of new chemical  substances  whose biological effects on man
are unknown and whose maximum  permissible  concentrations have not been
established.  One such chemical  is  acetophenone , which  is  the subject of
our study.

     Acetophenone is used in organic synthesis in  the chemico-pharmaceutical
industry, the perfume industry,  etc.  However, the consumption of acetophenone
in these industries  is not large, and no high  acetophenone contents in the
discharges should therefore be expected.   The  chief source of contamination
of atmospheric air with acetophenone is  the production  of  acetone and phenol
by the cumene process.  A product of side  reactions,  acetophenone is present
in atmospheric air in equal amounts with the starting materials  and end
products, and frequently surpasses  them  in  quantity (M. I.  Fongauz, 1958;
V. P. Melekhina et al. , 1961).   However, no data on the effect of low concen-
trations of acetophenone on the human organism have been  reported thus far
in the Soviet or foreign literature.  We therefore undertook the task of
making a hygienic evaluation of  acetophenone as an atmospheric contaminant.
     Acetophenone CgHsO  (methyl phenyl ketone)  is  an  organic compound,  an
aliphatic-aromatic ketone.  It has a  characteristic pungent  odor resembling
that of the bird cherry.  Its melting point is  19.6°C.  and boiling point
202. 9°C.  Acetophenone is sparingly soluble in  water, but dissolves well
in ethyl alcohol, diethyl ether and other  organic  solvents.   Methyl phenyl
ketone is quite reactive: it can be nitrated, sulfonated, gives  all the
reactions with mercuric  chloride, ammonium chloride,  and phosphoric and
picric acids.  The chlorination product of acetophenone, chloroacetophenone ,
is a very strong lachrymator.

     To determine low acetophenone concentrations  in  atmospheric air, we
initially used Khrustaleva's method,  based on the  property of acetophenone
of giving with metadinitrobenzene a pink color  in  an  alcohol medium in  the
presence of an alkali.   However, the  sensitivity of this method, 1 yg/2 ml,
proved inadequate.  For  this reason,  a spectrophotometric method of determ-
ination of acetophenone was developed under the supervision  of M.  D. Manita.
The method is based on a selective absorption of certain rays of the light
source passed through a  layer of the  liquid under  study.  In addition  to a
simple qualitative method in which photographs  of  spectra of the solution
                                    -  79 -

-------
 of  the  absorbing  substance  and  pure  solvent  are  compared,  use may be made
 of  a  photometer to  measure  the  fractions  of  the  light flux which are
 absorbed  at  different wavelengths, and the data  obtained can be used to
 plot  a  curve,  characteristic  of the  given substance,  of the dependence of
 the absorption intensity  on  the wavelength.

      In a quantitative  determination by the  spectral  method, one must
 check to  see whether the  substance obeys  Beer.'s  law,  according to which
 the absorption is proportional  to  the number of  molecules  in the path of
 the beam,  i.e., to  the  concentration of the  substance.   Studies made with
 acetophenone along  these  lines  have  shown that Beer's law  is obeyed in
 work  with  low  concentrations  of an alcohol solution  of acetophenone.  Its
 absorption spectra  in ethyl  alcohol  are characterized by a rather high
 optical density.  Thus, at  a  maximum A of 244 my,  the log  of the molar
 extinction coefficient  is 4.2,  which corresponds to  the number 15,850.
 Such  a  coefficient  permits  the  observation of small  amounts of acetophenone
 in  alcohol solution (Gilem  and  Shtern,  1957).  On  the basis of theoretical
 calculations,  a solution  of  acetophenone  in  ethyl  alcohol  in 1 mg/1
 (1  Mg/ml)  concentration is  characterized  by  an optical density of 0.130
 (quotient  obtained  by dividing  the molar  coefficient  15,850 by a millimole
 of  acetophenone 120,144).  The  optical density of  an  alcohol solution of
 acetophenone, determined by means of an SF-4 spectrophotometer, was found
 to  be 0.128 in our  case.  Commercial acetophenone  contains only 97% of
 pure  acetophenone,  and  therefore the optical density  of our standard
 solution was 0.130.

      To determine acetophenone  vapors,  the air was collected in a modified
 Zaytsev absorber  containing AMS brand silica gel,  at  a rate of 4 1/min.
 Five ml of ethyl  alcohol was  then poured  over the  adsorbent, decanted after
 30  min, and examined in the spectrophotometer.   The standard used was ethyl
 alcohol which had been in contact, with  2  g of silica  gel in order to create
 identical  conditions for the  sample  and the  standard.   The optical density of
 the solution thus obtained was  used  to  determine the  amount of acetophenone
by  means of a calibration graph, then its concentration was calculated from
 the formula
                              A  x 5 x 1000
                             	

where A is the optical density  and V is the  volume of air  in liters drawn
 through the absorber.  This method made it possible to raise the sensitivity
 of  the determination of acetophenone to 0.25  yg/ml.

      In the medical literature,  acetophenone is  mentioned  in the 1870-1880's,
when Dujardin-Beaumetz* and Barde proposed it  under the  name "hypnone" as a
 soporific.  However, studies  of several authors  (Hirt,  1886; Rohfenbiller,
 1887;  Seifert, 1887) showed that it  is  not always possible to achieve the
soporific  effect of hypnone,  and that  the use of the  compound in high doses
involves a certain  risk: the blood pressure  of the patients drops,  the
 * [Translator's note:  Dyuzharde-Bomets, according to the transliteration  of Russian reference.]
                                     -  80  -

-------
breathing rhythm is altered,  the pulse weakens  and  fatigue  increases
(Laborde, 1885, S. S. Kamenskiy, 1889).  A study  of  the  literature  deal-
ing with the effect of hypnone reveals contradictions in  the  interpreta-
tion of the problems of action of acetophenone.   We  have  been unable  to
find any indications of a study of the threshold  of  action  of acetophenone
on the human and animal organism either in the  domestic  or  in foreign
literature.

     The presence of the characteristic pungent odor of  acetophenone
enabled us to start our investigations from  a certain threshold  of  olfac-
tory sensation.  To produce specific  concentrations  of acetophenone vapors,
we used an apparatus recommended by the Committee on the  Sanitary Pro-
tection of Atmospheric Air.

     We determined the threshold of olfactory sensation  of  acetophenone
in 18 practically healthy people 18 to 60 years old.  The effect of a
single concentration was observed during the day; pauses  between the
experiments lasted over four hours.   An individual sensation  threshold was
established for each subject, and the threshold concentration was considered
to be that which the subject  could correctly identify no  fewer than twice
out of three determinations.  A total of 455 determinations were made.

                                               Table  1
                          Threshold of Olfactory Sensation  of
                               Acetophenone Vapors.

Number of
Subjects
1
2
H
. 1
Concentration, ms/m*
Minimum
Perceptible
0.08
0.027
0,02
0,01
Imperceptible
0,05
0,02
0,01
0,008
     As can be seen from Table 1, the threshold of olfactory sensation
in the most sensitive persons is 0.01 mg/mX  The 0.008 mg/m3 concentra-
tion was found to be the sub threshold value.

     The stimulation of one perception system inevitably results in a
change in the functions of the other perception systems.  This is explained
by the fact that after stimulating the receptors of one system, the impulses
reach the cortex, where they produce an excitation center which radiates
over the cortex and thus encompasses other areas.  This situation also
applies to the olfactory system.  Several authors have shown that the stimu-
lation of the olfactory system by ammonium hydroxide, bergamot oil, and
pyridine in toluene causes an increase in the light sensitivity of the eye
                                    - 81 -

-------
 (K. Kh. Kekcheyev, 0. L. Matyushenko, 1936; P. 0. Makarov, 1958).

     In hygienic practice, researchers have observed the action of sub-
 threshold  odor  concentrations of various substances on the light sensi-
 tivity of  the eye  (F. I. Dubrovskaya, 1957; Yu. G. Fel'dman, 1960, and
 others).

     We also studied this phenomenon in three subjects by means of an
 ADM adaptometer in a darkened room.  Pure air or acetophenone of known
 concentration was supplied to a cylinder for 10 minutes until the first
 determination of the light sensitivity.  The observation lasted no fewer
 than three days with each concentration.  Acetophenone in 0.02 mg/m^
 concentration was  found to cause a decrease in the light sensitivity of
 the eye in all  three subjects.  The 0.015 mg/m^ concentration led to a
 decrease in light sensitivity in two subjects, but it was less pronounced
 than during the action of a higher concentration, and in one subject, to
 an increase of the sensitivity.  Acetophenone in 0.01 mg/m3 concentration
 caused a change in the light sensitivity of only one subject; the 0.007
 mg/m3 concentration was inactive.  Table 2 lists data on the light sensi-
 tivity of  the eye during the course of the study.

     Fig.  1 shows data on one of the subjects.  The changes occurring under
 the influence of inhalation of acetophenone vapors in the brain itself
were then investigated.  This was done by using the method of functional
 loading, which is based on the property of living tissue of reproducing a
 certain number of electric oscillations (N. Ye. Vvedenskiy, 1952).

     Under natural conditions, afferent impulses from various exteroceptors
 and interoceptors continually reach the central nervous system.   Consequently,
 the use of rhythmic stimuli in the study of the functional capacity of the
 central nervous system is natural and expedient.

     "In the lability parameter we had a perfectly independent characteristic
 of the functional capacity of the tissue; this parameter reaches deeper
 into the intimate essence of the processes taking place and predicts the
 functional shifts taking place more accurately than temporal parameters
 (chronaxy, etc.) aimed at characterizing a single excitation wave" (L. V.
 Latmazanova, 1938).

     Recently, many studies have appeared dealing with the ability of
 cortical elements to rearrange their rhythmics to correspond to a given
 frequency  (V.  S. Rusinov, 1957; N.  V.  Golikov, 1956, and others).  To eval-
 uate the functional state of the brain, the electroencephalographic method
was made to include functional tests allowing for changes in the electroen-
 cephalogram in response to afferent stimuli.   They are based on the follow-
ing electrophysiological law:  any excitation is associated with an electrical
effect, which constitutes one of the aspects  of the complex process of
                                    - 82  -

-------
excitation.   The presence of the constant activity  of  the cortex inter-
feres with  the  study of the biocurrents at rest.  However,  the use of
a  load,  for example, a rhythmic photic stimulus, may give rise to pro-
cesses  taking place in latent form in the organism.  The rearrangement
                     1/E
                    (.in thousands)
                    ?50-

                    ?oo-
                   c
                   
-------
                                                                                                                       Table 2
                                     Change in the Light Sensitivity of the Eye  After  Inhalation of Acetophencne Vapors.
Acetophenone
v*
1 ' Light Sensitivity of the Eye During Observation
Concentration,
='m k minute
5 minutes
10
minutes
.15f
minutes
20
minutes
25 1 30
minutes j minutes
i
40
minutes
                                                                             Subject N.
00
.p-
                                   Pure Ai.r
                                     0,02
                                     0,015
                                     0,010
                                     0,007
                                   Pure Air
                                     0,02
                                     0,015
                                     0,010
26,8
12,3
12,2
20,1
25,6
987
376
359
1 170
'. 448
7 835 .
4 350
3 590
6 520
8 273
14 650
4 583
6 033
8 080
15 167
16 200
5857
6 72G
10 740
17 166
19 600
6 037
7 262
11 333
21 100
25 000
G ISO
7 426
11 600
23 933
22 900
6 323
7 604
11 900
24 433
                                                                             Subject '-T.
22,8 •
8,0
29,9
22 ,' 3
2 930
2 113
2 930
2 680
13167
6530
8 533
1 
-------
 the  fourth minute.  Prior  to  the  administration  of  the  experimental  mixture,
 the  background was  recorded two to  three  times,  then  the  mixture  of  pure
 air  and  acetophenone was supplied for  five minutes.   In the  fourth minute  the
 light stimulus was  turned  on,  and further determinations  were  made as  in
 the  case  of supply  of pure air.  The entire experiment  lasted  40-50  minutes.
 To achieve a better objectivity of  the  results of the electroencephalographic
 study, we recorded  the  action  potentials  by using a method proposed  by the
 British  scientists  Lovell  and  Dosset*(cited by G. N.  Speranskiy,  Yu. M.
 Pratusevich and N.  M. Korzh,  1960).  The  synchronization  factor,  expressed
 as the ratio of the quantity  of synchronized  (coinciding) oscillations to
 the  quantity of light stimuli  supplied  during 5  seconds,  was  calculated in
 percent  from the formula
                                    Ps
                               Ks =  p-  x 100,
                                    *n
where Ks is the synchronization factor, Ps is the quantity of  synchronized
 oscillations, and Pn is the quantity of light pulses  supplied.

     At  the same time,  the energy of each synchronized  potential  (either
 in millimeters of the height  reached by the pen  of  the  electroencephalograph,
 or in microvolts) and the height of the synchronized  spike multiplied  by
 the  calibration factor with which the  recording  of  the  electroencephalogram
was  made were calculated.  The total energy of assimilated rhythms during
 the  action of the light stimulus in the form  of  rhythmic  light  flickerings
 lasting  45 seconds was  also determined.

     Studies of the acetophenone concentrations  (0.007  and 0.003  mg/rn-^)
 did  not  reveal any  distinct change  in  the synchronization factor  in  any of
 the  subjects.  As far as the total  energy of  the rhythm assimilated  by the
brain during inhalation of acetophenone vapors in 0.007 mg/nH  concentration,
 there occurred a 35-40% statistically  reliable decrease of this energy in
 all  the subjects in the 2nd-6th minute.   The  0.003  mg/m3  concentration did
not  cause any changes.  Such phenomena  were also observed in healthy people
 (V.  V. Artem'yev, 1962; Ye. N. Sokolov, 1962).   Fig.  2  graphically shows
the  dynamics of change in  the  amplitude of the assimilated rhythm (energy)
 under the influence of inhalation of acetophenone vapors  in  two subjects in
whom changes were observed in  the 2nd minute  after  the  gas mixture was
supplied.

     Thus, the threshold of action  of  acetophenone  on the electrical activity
of the brain is 0.007 mg/m^, whereas the  thresholds of  smell and  change of
 the  light sensitivity of the eye are 0.01 mg/m^.  The 0.003 mg/m^ concentra-
tion was found to be inactive, as indicated by all  the  tests,  and can  be
recommended as the highest single maximum permissible value.

     Experimental studies of the effect of acetophenone on the  organisms of
animals were made in the 1870's - 1880's  simultaneously with clinical

 * [Translator's note:  Lovel1 and Doset, according to the transliteration  of  Russian reference. J
                                    - 85 -

-------
observations of the effects of hypnone.   The experiments were  conducted
on  frogs,  cats, guinea pigs and  monkeys.   Acetophenone was  injected sub-
cutaneously and intravenously, and  also  introduced into the stomach.
However,  all these studies were  made  with relatively high  concentrations
and had  the character of acute experiments (S. S. Kamenskiy et al.).
Mairet and Combemalle (1885) attempted to carry out a dynamic  exposure
of  the animals, and for this purpose  placed two cats, a guinea pig, and
a rabbit  in a wooden box with a  volume of 175 dm^ with slits and kept
them  there for 1 hour and 10 minutes.   An atomizer was used to introduce
a mixture  of 3 g of acetophenone, 10  ml  of alcohol and 200  ml  of water
into  the box during this entire  period.   Muscular weakness  and paretic
symptoms were noted in all the animals.   Unfortunately, it  is  impossible
to  use the authors' data for an  accurate  calculation of the concentration
to  which  the animals were exposed.  There is no doubt that  this concen-
tration was high.   No data are available  on the influence  of low aceto-
phenone  concentrations during a  long-term exposure.
                Background
                 Fig. 2.  Dynamics of change in the amplitude of assimilated
                 rhythm during the action of acetophenone vapors. Average data
                 for subjects V. and A.
                 AB - 4 minutes of inhalation of gas; BC - period in minutes after
                 inhalation of gas. 1 - inhalation of pure air; 2 - acetophenone
                 concentration, 0.003 mg/nP; 3 - acetophenone concentration,
                                   0.007 n^/m3.

     To study  the chronic action of acetophenone, a round-the-clock
exposure of white rats to acetophenone  in  concentrations of 0.007 and
0.07 mg/m^ was carried out for 70 days.   The 45 males selected,  weighing
60-70 g, were  divided  into three groups.   The first group was exposed to
acetophenone in 0.007  mg/m3 concentration, the second to 0.07 mg/m3,  and
the third was  the control.  The acetophenone content in the first chamber
                                    -  86  -

-------
was an average of 0.007 + 0.0008 mg/m^, and in the second chamber,
0.076 + 0.002 mg/m3.

     The influence of acetophenone on the organism was evaluated by
observing the behavior and weight change of the animals and studying
the chronaxy of antagonist muscles, the cholinesterase activity, and
protein fractions of the blood serum.

     No peculiarities of any kind were observed in the behavior of the
animals during the entire course of the chronic experiment.  The rats
were active and gained weight equally in all groups.  The weight was
measured every ten days.

     Numerous authors who have studied the ratios of chronaxies of
antagonist muscles have shown that this parameter may be used as a cri-
terion for the effect of noxious substances on the central nervous system,
as expressed in a decrease of subordination (Yu. M. Uflyand, 1941;
0. V.  Verzilova, 1947; F. S. Trop, 1958).

     The hygienic literature contains a report of a decrease in the in-
fluence of the cerebral cortex on the level of motor chronaxy of antag-
onist muscles during long-term exposure to vapors of noxious substances
in low concentrations (V. A. Gofmekler, 1961;  Yu. G. Fel'dman, 1960;
G. I.  Solomin, 1961, and others).

     We determined the motor chronaxy  by  means of an electronic pulse
stimulator,  model ISE-01, once every 10 days.   Fig. 3 shows that the curve
of the chronaxy of extensors in rats of the first (0.007 mg/m^) and con-
trol groups  is higher than the curve of chronaxy of flexors during the
entire course of observation, i.e., a normal ratio of chronaxies of the
antagonist muscles exists.   In the second  group (0.07 mg/m^), however,
by the end of the second month of exposure, an inverse ratio of the
chronaxies of flexors and extensors occurred.

     In our study, we decided to follow the change of cholinesterase
activity as  well.  A sharp change of this  activity is observed in many
diseases,  and also when the organism is acted  upon by chemical substances.
Investigators note that chemical substances (hydrogen sulfide, tetraethyl
lead,  Dowtherm, phenol, etc.) in high concentrations cause an inactivation
of the enzyme, which may be reversible or  irreversible, depending on the
degree to which the activity of the enzyme has been depressed.  The
hygienic literature also contains studies  indicating a change of cholines-
terase activity even during exposure to noxious substances in low concen-
trations (G.  I. Solomin, 1961, R. Ubaydullayev, 1962, and others).

     To determine the cholinesterase activity, we used the chemical method
of Pokrovskiy (1953) modified by A. P. Martynova (1957).   The method is
                                    - 87 -

-------
based on a determination  of the time required for a change in  the color
of  the indicator to occur as a result of  the  pH shift during hydrolysis
of  acetylcholine.
                    0.15-\
                            Dates -of examinations
                    Fig. 3.  Average data on the chronaxy of
                    antagonist muscles in rats during exposure
                    to acetophenone.
                    1 - first group (0.007 mg/m3); II - second
                    group (0.07 mg/m?); III - control
                    1 - extensors; 2 - flexors; AB - period of
                    exposure.
     The  change of cholinesterase activity was  observed on five  rats  of
each group,  once every two weeks.   During exposure,  a change in  the  activ-
ity of  the enzyme was observed  in rats of the second group (0.07 mg/m3)
toward  the second month of exposure, but these  changes were not  the  same.
Thus, in  three rats of this  group (Fig. 4), there was a 22% depression
of cholinesterase activity (as  compared with the background of this  group
and the control group).  A reverse reaction was observed in one  rat,
i.e., a 45%  increase in cholinesterase activity.

     Acetophenone in 0.007 mg/m^ concentration  (first group)  did not
cause any statistically reliable changes of cholinesterase activity  under
these conditions.
                                      - 88 -

-------
            in
            01
              so-
            in

            o
              JO-
            o
            o
            CO
                                                   X.
                                                    >.» tt
'^^^B^S^2Z77^^^SZSZZ^S^^l^
- —      ^       -*.„,'!
                'VII
                            Dates of examinations
              Fig. 4.  Influence of acetophenone on the cholinesterase
              activity of whole blood of white rats.
                          Notation same as in Fig. 3.
     Recent  literature  contains abundant material pertaining  to  the  study
of blood proteins.   As  we  know, serum proteins possessing  the same mobili-
ty in an electric  field can be fractionated into albumins  and ex,  6 and  y
globulins.   In  various  diseases, and also., under the influence of  unfavor-
able external factors,  both the total amount of protein and the  ratio of
the protein  fractions in the blood undergo a change.

     In the  practice of hygienic standardization of noxious substances  in
atmospheric  air, the method of study of the ratio of protein fractions  in
the blood was first  used by R.  Ubaydullayev (1961).  The author explained
that furfural in 10  mg/nH  concentration in long-term action causes a marked
change in the ratio  of  the protein fractions of the blood:  the  content  of
albumins decreases by 33-40% when compared with the initial level.   When
furfural was present in 0.33 mg/m3 concentration, the changes were less
definite in  character.   Only a concentration of 0.052 mg/m3 was found to
be inactive  under  the same conditions.

     We determined the  total amount of  protein by means of an RPL-2
refractometer,  and the  protein fractions by paper electrophoresis.   The
phoregrams obtained, colored with an acid blue-black dye, were cut into
fractions and eluted with  a 0.1 N solution of sodium hydroxide, then sub-
jected to colorimetric  analysis on FEK-N-57.  The sum of the figures
obtained from the  colorimetric analysis of each individual fraction  was
taken as 100, then the  percent content  of each fraction was correspond-
ingly calculated.

     To check the investigation, five rats of each group were selected.
The blood sample was taken prior to feeding, once every 20 days.  No
                                    --89 -

-------
changes of total protein were  observed, but  the  ratios  of the protein
fractions underwent a  change.  In  rats of  the  second group (0.07 mg/m3),
a decrease in albumins to 24-35% was  observed  by the end of the first
month of exposure as compared  with the initial level (38.7-48.9%) and
with rats of the control group.  The  amount  of globulins increased cor
respondingly.  At the  start of the second  month  of  exposure, a sharp
decrease of the albumin - a globulin  ratio was noted.   Only on the 20th
day after the end of exposure  had  the protein  indicators of rats of this
group reverted to their initial values.

     In rats of the first group  (0.007 mg/m^), no changes in the protein
fractions were observed as compared with the control group (Fig. 5).

     Some of the rats  from each group were sacrificed after the completion
of exposure for the purpose of histopathological analysis.  Changes in
the form of congestion of the  cardiac vessels  and a pronounced dystrophy
of the liver were observed only in rats of the second group (0.07 mg/m^).
               100
                IS
(ft
a
•H
I*
o *•
rH in
a c >
                SO
                    :>o
                     JS
^Wrt
t»i
^i^fe!
                                       m
                                          Sf

                                    31
                                iPM
                                ^w/\--::
                          Kin- Kin
                           %     %
                            Kin  KIH   Kin
                                 Dates of Tests
               Fig. 5.  Change in the ratio of albumins and globulins in
               the blood of white rats during exposure to acetophenone.   ,
               I - first group (0.007 mg/m3); II - second group (0.07 mg/nr);
                              K - control group
     On the basis of the results of  the  studies,  we  can recommend an average
daily maximum permissible concentration  of  acetophenone in atmospheric air
at the level of the highest single concentration, i.e., 0.003 mg/m.3.

     We also determined acetophenone in  air around the plant section pro-
ducing acetone and phenol by the cumene  process  at a synthetic alcohol
plant.  Acetophenone was formed as the product of a  side reaction.   The
sources of its discharge into the atmosphere are  sections for the produc-
tion and decomposition of isopropylbenzene  hydroperoxide and for process-
ing of the by-products.  The discharges  seep through leaks in the equipment,
packing glands, flanged joints, during the  collection of samples, and
through the system of local ventilation.  In addition to acetophenone, many
other substances reach the atmospheric air.
                                     - 90 -

-------
     In June-July  1962, we  collected  single samples of atmospheric air
around this plant  at  a distance  of  100 to 2000 m.   Acetophenone in the
samples was determined colorimetrically.   Results  of analyses of the
air samples are  given in  Table 3.

                                                Table 3

               Single Concentrations of Acetophenone in Atmospheric Air
                    Around  a Synthetic.Alcohol Plant.

Distance from
_ Source of
Discharges, m
100
kOO
800
1,200
1,600
2,000
Number of Samples

Total

3
•26
28
25
26
25
Of these,
above the
sgnsitivity
of the method
3
25
18
11
6
0

Maximum
Concentration, mg/m-5

0,023
0,028
0,016
0,007
0,007

     On the basis of the  laboratory  data obtained for the contamination
of atmospheric air with acetophenone,  the administration of the plant was
given specific recommendations  for improving the surrounding air reservoir.
We believe, however, that  this  is only a temporary measure.

     The enterprise constitutes  a large source  of contamination of atmos-
pheric air x^ith various chemical substances.   The only radical means of
purifying the surrounding  medium would be the development of new technolog-
ical processes.
                                 Conclusions

     1.  The threshold of olfactory  sensation  of acetophenone and its
reflex effect on the light sensitivity  of  the  eye lie at a level of
0.01 mg/m3.

     2.  The threshold of the  reflex effect  on the electrical activity of
the brain in the most sensitive  persons  is 0.007 mg/m^.

    ' 3.  Acetophenone in 0.07  mg/m^  concentration during chronic exposure
of experimental animals causes changes  that  are both functional (disturbance
of the ratio of chronaxies of  antagonist muscles, and of protein fractions
of the blood, depression or  activation  of  the  enzyme cholinesterase) and
organic (pathological changes  in internal  organs).
                                     - 91 -

-------
       4.    Under the  same  conditions,  acetophenone  in 0.007  mg/m^ concen-
tration does not  cause  any  changes in  the organism.

       5.    On  the basis  of the  study,  we  are  proposing  a highest  single  and
average daily  maximum  permissible  concentration of  acetophenone of
0.003 mg/m3.
                                        LITERATURE  CITED


                   A.iCKCCcna M. B.,   K p 1.1 .'i o i> a  H. A.,   X p y c T a ;i c u a  B.  A.
                     OllpCAC.>1CIMIC npO.MC>lICT MiiCTiiTyia  runicim IIMCIIII
                     <1>.  . 3piiCM.ina,  19GO.
                   A-;I ;i A »< a ;i o u a  H.  A. McA-'ieiniuc   S.ICKTPHMCCKIIC   iiOTCiiuna.'ii,!  n
                     ro.iomiOM Mosry. Ha.'i.'AH CCCP, M., 1962,  crp. 71—79.
                   A |) T e M i> c n  B.  B.  HeiiOTOpuc oco6ciuiocTii  uuauamiux   s.iCKTpii'ie-
                     CKIIX  noTciiiuia.'ioi)  Kopu  GO.TMUIIX iio.iyinapiiii.   Octionnwc  uonpocu
                     3JiCKT|>o(])ii3iio.noriiii uciiTpa.TMio:"!  nepDiioi": CIICTCMM. MSA.  AM  VCCP,
                     KMCU,  1962.
                   B n c A c n c K n fi  H. E. CooTiioiiicniiii  MO/i\Ay  PIITMIIMCCKIIMH npouccca-
                     MII  n (JiyiiKiinoiiii.'ibiiori  aKTimiiocTLio  iiosOy>K,iciiiioro  ncpiiiio-Miiiinc'i-
                     iioro   viinapaTa.  I'lo.Tiioc  coflpaiinc co'iiniCMiiri.  /!.,  1952,  T. 3,
                     crp. 8-1—97.
                   B c p 3 ii .'i o ii a 0  B.  Dio.i.i. 3KCiicp.   Cuo.n. n  MC.H.,  1947,  T.  23, u. G,
                     CT|). 411—412.
                   FO^IIKOIJ II. B. ii3iio.'ioni'iccKiic OCHOFIW Tcopmi
                     rpa(])ini.  B KM.:  Bonpocw rcopiiu  n   iipaKTHKii
                     (j)ini. Jl..  I95G, crp. 3—26. •
                   f o (])  M c K .'i c p  B. A.  MaTCpna.ni>! K  o6ocno!):niiiio iipc.'ie.ni.no  ;iony-
                     cniMoii KoiiuciiTpaiuHi ancraron  n   aTMOc(])cpno.\i  uo3,ayxc.  /.luce.
                     Kan/i.  M., IOGI.
                   /I y C  p o D c K a ii   O.   H.  riiniciiii'iccKnn    oncin;a  aarpnaiiciiiiocTii
                     ncwiyxa CoJii.moro  ropo;ia ccpiiiicrwM raaoM. /.Ui^c. i.  <1>. 3piicMana, 1961, crp. 16.
                                                  -  92  -

-------
 n o K p o » c K >i ft A. A.  BOCII.-MCA. >Kypn., 1953, A'» 9, cip.  9—13.
Co KO.HO 11 E.  II. IlpiipoAa (J)Oiionou  PIIT.MIIKM  Kopu  6o.ni.uinx  iio.iy-
  Uiapllfl  OCMOUIlliIC DOIlpOCbl 3jlCKTpO(p!!3HO.rIOriil!  UCUTpa.nMIOf!  MCpB-
  iioii  ciiCTe.Mbi.  HBA. AM YCCP, Kiica,  19G2, cip.  157—188.
C M o .1 n n  JI. M. O6 ycnoeiiini piiTwa CHCTOHUX MC.ibKaniiii  npi: o-iaro-
  BO.M  iioBpoKAeimii iia  iicpiic])cpiiii.  PctjjcpaTu   AOK.ia;ion 5-ii Koiujic-
  pciiiliiii MO.IOAUX yiienij.x  MiicTiiryTa iiopMa.nbiiofi n  naro.noni'iccKoi'i
  (|)M3i!0.ioriiii. M.,  1959, crp. 71—72.
Cucpn nc Kiifi f.  H.,  nparyccuii'i  10.  M.  flAH  CCCP,  1961,
  T. 139,  n. 13, crp. 759—762.                              .   .
Tpon  .  C. XponaiiCHsi  iicpiicjicpii'iccKiix  iicpiiiio-Mi.iuic'iiiLix-npnuo-
  pon  i! neiiTpa.nLiiLi.x AiinraTC;iMii,ix iiciiponon  npH  OTpiiii.iciiini   >KII-
  noviiiiix cepoyr.ncpOAOM,  M-
  no AOiiycTiiMofi KoiiuciiTpaiiiiii  (Jiypcjiypo/in  B  aT.MOcc|)cpnoM  »03Ayxc.
  7-lncc. KniiA. M.,  1962.        .                                  •;•
V (|) i\ r. ii A  10.-M.  Teop:in n  npaKTiixn  xpoiiaKcii.Mcrpi'in.  .0.,  1941.
<;) c n i, A M :s " 10. f. fiir. 'ii  can.,  1960, ^?> 5, cip. 3—7.
«1> o ii r a y.3 A\.  M.  riiriicua rpy/ia n nponaiioACTue 4'Ciio.T.T  if auero-
  iia '  KyMo.nbiiwM   cnocoCo.M.   OT'ICT   MiiCTiiTyra    rni'iiciiu   IIMCIIII
  . ci>: SpiicMana. M., 1959, crp. 100.
I" ii n i\ c M  A., 11.1 rep E.  3.ncKT|)oiniiiic ciicurpbi nor.noLH.cnnn  opraiui-
  'ICCKIIX  • cocAiuiciiiiii.   H3A.  iinocTpaitiioii   ^iiTCparypLi.  .M.,   1957,
  a p.  5—331.                       •                        • "    •
Lal>or
-------
             CYCLOHEXANOL AND CYCLOREXANONE IN ATMOSPHERIC AIR

                      AND THEIR HYGIENIC SIGNIFICANCE
                              A. A. Dobrinskiy
                    Department of Coirjnunal Hygiene, Central Institute for
                           Advanced Training of Physicians

From "Biologicheskoe deystvie i  gigienicheskoe  znachenie  atmosfernykh
zagryazneniy".  Pod redaktsiey Prof. V. A.  Ryazanova i  Prof.  M.  S.  Gol'dberga.
Izdatel'stvo "Meditsina" Moskva, p. 119-132,  (1966).

     The main object of our study was  to establish  the  maximum permissible
concentrations in atmospheric air  for  two substances:   cyclohexanol and
cyclohexanone.  The present report  presents  data for the  validation of the
highest single maximum permissible  concentrations of these  substances.

     Both substances are good solvents and  find  broad applications  in such
branches of industry as the production of leather,  lacquers,  dyes,  and
other synthetic materials.  Cyclohexanol and  cyclohexanone  are mainly used
as starting materials and intermediate products  for syntheses.   In  particu-
lar, they are widely employed as intermediates in the production of capro-
lactam and adipic acid, which are  the monomers in the production of the
synthetic fibers caprone and nylon.

     In 1958, 40% of all the polyamide resins were  obtained from capro-
lactam.  The preparation of this product is  one  of  the  large-tonnage pro-
cesses in present-day industrial organic synthesis.

     When cyclohexanol and cyclohexanone are  used in industry, they may
escape into atmospheric air.  Thus, in the production of  caprolactam, the
operational cycles are carried out  at high  temperatures,  which in the pro-
cesses of synthesis of intermediate products  promotes the escape of cyclo-
hexanol and cyclohexanone into the  ventilation air,  etc.

     Both substances studied belong to the  group of aliphatic hydrocarbons
of the cyclohexane series.  One  of  them (cyclohexanol)  is an  alcohol and
the other a ketone.  Both are colorless liquids  with  similar  physicochem-
ical constants (Table 1).

     These indices demonstrate to some extent the similarity  of  the
toxicological properties, since  a definite  relationship has been established
between the structure of many organic compounds  and their biological effect
(N. V.  Lazarev, 1944; A. A. Golubev, Ye. I. Lyublina, 1962).
                                   - 94 -

-------
                                                       Table 1
                Physicochemical Constants of Cyclohexanol and Cyclohexanone.
No.
1
2
3
4
5


6

Constants
Molecular weight
Specific gravity
Boiling point
Ignition point
Temperature coefficient
in deg/mm at 760 ram Hg
Vapor pressure in mm Hg,
Refractive index for the
sodium D line 50°/15°




of vapor pressure

141. 4° /1 2. 5"
wavelength of

Cyclohexanone
100.1
0.962
160.1°
67.8°
0.045

400
1.461

Cyclohexenol
98.1
0.947
157°
64°
0.046

400
1.451

     The methods of preparation of  cyclohexanol  and  cyclohexanone  have
been worked out on a large industrial scale  and  are  carried  out  in a single
production cycle.  The product thus obtained contains both substances.
Various means are used to separate  the mixture and isolate cyclohexanol
and cyclohexanone.  The starting product -in  the  different methods  of pre-
paration may be phenol, cyclohexane, nitrocyclohexane,  eyelonexylamine,
nitrobenzene, or benzene (M. M. Shumilina et al., 1959; Polhar,  Sugino
Kiichiro et al., 1957; D. R. Cova,  1961).

     Data on the toxicological characteristics of these substances are
scarce.  Cyclohexanol and cyclohexanone are  capable  of  irritating  the upper
respiratory tract and of having a narcotic effect in high concentrations.
Inhalation of their vapors leads to disorders of the central nervous system
and changes in the picture of the peripheral blood.  Both substances or
products of their transformation are excreted with the  urine in  the  form of
compounds with sulfates, causing the excretion of bound sulfites.   Cyclo-
hexanone has a marked damaging effect on the blood vessels and liver, a
depressing effect on the function of the adrenal cortex, and an  effect on
the thyroid gland (G. V. Lobovikova and A. A. Preobrazhenskaya,  1950;
G. V.  Lobovikova, 1954; A.  P. Voronin, 1958;  Treon,  Crutchfield, Kitzmiller,
1943;  Nelson, Ege, 1943, 1945).

    • Cyclohexanone has a pronounced chronoconcentration effect (A. P. Voronin,
1958).  This is confirmed by a decrease in the threshold concentrations  of
the gas when the exposure is extended.

     In practice, the main routes by which these substances  reach  the
organism are the upper respiratory tract and the skin.  The  majority of  the
authors who have studied the influence of cyclohexanol  and cyclohexanone on
                                    - 95 -

-------
 the organism have tested high concentrations of these substances.

     In short-term experiments with penetration into the organism of
 experimental animals by inhalation, G. V. Lobovikova tested cyclohexanol
 concentrations above 250 rng/m-^, and cyclohexanone concentrations above
 160 mg/m^.  In A. P. Voronin's experiments, the cyclohexanone concentra-
 tions exceeded 500 mg/m^.

     Under chronic action conditions, the concentrations were also high:
 for cyclohexanol, 400 mg/m3, and for  cyclohexanone, 100 mg/m^ (G. V.
 Lobovikova) and 2000 mg/m^  (A. P. Voronin).

     The influence of cyclohexanol and cyclohexanone on the higher nervous
 activity of animals has been the subject of several studies.  Lobovikova
 established that cyclohexanone vapors in 100-400 mg/m3 concentration under
 conditions of chronic administration  and with an exposure of 3-6 hours by
 inhalation caused changes in the conditioned reflex activity of white
 rats.

     Voronin describes disturbances of the conditioned reflex activity of
 rabbits (the study was made by using Ye. I. Lyublina's method) with an
 average cyclohexanone concentration of 4000 mg/m3.

     V. A. Savelova, A. S. Bruk and N. V. Klimkina (1962) observed that
 the threshold dose in the study by the conditioned reflex method (rats)
was 0.04 mg/kg of cyclohexanol.

     Foreign authors (Treon et al.) believe cyclohexanol to be more toxic
 than cyclohexanone.

     Lobovikova studied the toxicity  of these substances when administered
via the gastrointestinal tract.  She established that cyclohexanone causes
intoxication symptoms in lower doses.

     The maximum permissible concentration for plant sections was determined
 to be 10 mg/m3 for cyclohexanone and was not determined for cyclohexanol.

     We have been unable to find any  data on the contamination of atmospheric
air by these substances in the domestic or foreign literature.

    •Q. M. Gavruseyko and A. S. Maslennikov (1950) in a survey of production
 department  of a caprolactam plant observed concentrations of cyclohexanone
from 1.5 to 10 mg/m^ and cyclohexanol from 0.4 to 2.8 rng/m^ in working areas
in the dehydrogenation section, and up to 14 mg/m3 of cyclohexanone and up
to 16 mg/m^ of cyclohexanol in the fractionation section.  These concentra-
 tions caused intoxication symptoms in the workers.  Headache was the most
 frequent complaint,  and various autonomic disturbances were noted.   The
                                   - 96 -

-------
prime objective symptom was a tendency to develop hypochromic anemia
 (cited by 0. M. Gavruseyko and A. S. Maslennikov).  The authors ascribe
the principal effect to cyclohexanone.

     Thus,  there are data on the toxic effect of relatively high concen-
trations of  cyclohexanol and cyclohexanone in both the domestic and for-
eign literature.  The investigations were carried out only in acute
experiments  or under conditions of chronic action with exposure lasting
up to 8 hours.

     We have not found in the literature any data on the thresholds of
action of these substances, which could have been used for validating their
maximum permissible concentrations.  Concentrations of the substances at
the level of those studied are lacking not only for atmospheric air but
also for the air of industrial buildings.

     All of  this prompted us to carry out studies that would permit the
validation  of the maximum permissible concentrations of cyclohexanol and
cyclohexanone in atmospheric air.  Colorimetric methods proposed by
A. S. Maslennikov (1960) were used in our studies for determining cyclo-
hexanol and  cyclohexanone in air.

     The method of determination of cyclohexanone is based on its conden-
sation with  furfural and the formation of furfurylidenecyclohexanone.  In
an acid medium, the compound turns a crimson color.  The sensitivity of
the method is 2 yg/ml.

     The method of determination of cyclohexanol is based on its reaction
with p-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde.  In the presence of sulfuric acid, the
compound colors the solution a cherry red.   The sensitivity of the method
is 5 pg/ml.   The methods are nonspecific, designed for the determination
of these substances when the latter are separately present in air.  How-
ever, in the experimental validation of the maximum permissible concentra-
tions, the work was done xvith each substance individually.

     In view of the inadequate sensitivity of the methods described, they
were modified under the direction of M. V.  Alekseyeva.   A spectrophoto-
metric determination was worked out in the visible region of the spectrum
with an absorption maximum for cyclohexanol at a wavelength of 510 my, and
for cyclohexanone at 550 my, which made it possible to increase the sensi-
tivity of the methods of determination substantially (to 0.05 yg/ml for
cyclohexanone and to 0.4 yg/ml for cyclohexanol).

     This increase in sensitivity was achieved by measuring the optical
density of the solutions in special glass cells with a length of 42 mm
and by modifying the method of collection of air samples.
                                   - 97 -

-------
      In  the  collection of  air samples for cyclohexanone, the absorbing
solution  used  consisted of purified distilled ethyl alcohol mixed with
distilled water  in  the proportion of 1:2 in the amount of 3 ml.  Absorb-
ers with  porous  plate  No.  2 placed in melting ice were employed.  At a
rate  of sample collection  of 0.5  1/min,  no breakthrough into the second
absorber  occurred within the sensitivity limits of the method.

      During  the  collection of air samples for cyclohexanol, the condi-
tions were the same, but the amount of the absorbing solution was reduced
to 3  ml.

      In substantiating the highest single maximum permissible concentra-
tions of  cyclohexanol  and  cyclohexanone,  we used the methods recommended
by the Committee on Sanitary Protection  of Atmospheric Air.  The thres-
holds of  olfactory sensation of the two  substances,  and the reflex change
of the light sensitivity of  the eyes  under the  influence of low cyclohex-
anone concentrations were  determined,  and the influence of  low  concentra-
tions of both substances on  the electrical activity  of the  brain was
studied by the method  of reinforcement of the intrinsic brain potentials
and by the method of development  of the  electrocortical conditioned reflex.

     The threshold of  olfactory sensation was determined for cyclohexanol
in 22, and for cyclohexanone  in 15  practically  healthy persons.   Results
of the determination are listed in  Table  2.
                                             Table 2

                 Thresholds of Olfactory Sensation for Cyclohexanol
                             and Cyclohexanone.
Number cf Subjects
• Concentration, mg/m?
Minimum
Perceptible
Imperceptible
Cyclohexanol
1
9
8
3
1
3,26
0,66
0,52
0,35
' 0.2-1
1,71
0,54
0,35
0,25
0,20
Gyclohexanone
2
3
1
6
3
3,0
1,19
0,77
0,37
0,21
1,21
0,80
0,41
0,23
0,14
                                    - 98 -

-------
      It is evident from Table 2 that the threshold for the most sensitive
 persons is a vapor concentration of 0.24 mg/m3 for cyclohexanol and 0.21
 mg/m3 for cyclohexanone.   Concentrations whose odor was imperceptible were
 0.20 mg/m3 for cyclohexanol and 0.14 mg/m3 for cyclohexanone.  In  order to
 substantiate the thresholds of the reflex effect on the functional state
 of the nervous system by the method of dark adaptation, considering the
 similarity of the thresholds of olfactory sensation of the two substances,
 we decided to experiment with cyclohexanone only, which has the lower
 threshold of olfactory sensation.

      Three people participated in  the study.   The threshold of olfactory
 sensation in one of them was 0.21  mg/m3, and in the other two, 0.37 mg/m3.
 The investigations were carried out with an ADM adaptometer by using a
 standard  procedure.  The active concentrations were considered to  be those
 at which  the difference of the average values of the light sensitivity
 during inhalation of  pure air and  of the gas  concentration studied was
 statistically reliable (Table 3).

                                                 Table J>
                  Light Sensitivity of the Eyes in the 20th and 25th minutes
                   of Adaptation During Inhalation of Cyclohexanone Vapors
                             in Percent of 15th MS&te.

Subject

L.

. B.

K.

Minute
of.
Examin-
ation
20-si
25->i
20-si
25 -si
20-si
25-si
Pure
Air

119.3
163,1
128,5
197,0
125,0
1-18,4
Cyclohexanone Concentration, mg/m3

0,11

132,0
151,0
MS, 3
198,0
1-13,0
167,0

/

1,57
1,2
3,24 '
0,2
4,3
0,4

o.oc

116,0
152,3
131,3
197,6
126,3
M5.3

/

0,7'
1,1
0,6
0.3
0,6
1,3
     Table 3 shows that statistically  reliable  changes  in the light sensi-
tivity of the eyes occurred only  in  the  20th  minute  of  dark adaptation, i.e.
immediately following  the inhalation of  the gas,  at  a cyclohexanone concen-
tration of 0.11 mg/m3.  This  cyclohexanone  concentration was found to be the
threshold value according to  the  method  employed.  A concentration of 0.06
mg/m3 was found to be  inactive.

     In order to substantiate  the highest single  maximum permissible concen-
trations of the various chemical  substances in  atmospheric air,  a number of
researchers (K.  A. Bushtuyeva, Ye. F.  Polezhayev,  A.  D.  Semenenko, 1960;
V. A. Gofmekler, 1960; Yu. G.  Fel'dman,  1960; Li  Sheng,  1961;  G.  I.  Solomin,
1961; R. U. Ubaydullayev, 1962; B. M.  Mukhitov, 1962; D.  G.  Odoshashvili,
1963, and others) successfully used  the  method  of  development  of  the
                                     -  99  -

-------
electrocortical conditioned reflex.  Low concentrations of the chemical
substances which had no subjective influence on the olfactory system
caused distinct changes in the electrical activity of the brain.

     Of late, there has been an increasing emphasis in electrophysiology
on a trend dealing with the bioelectric indicators under conditions where
a functional load is applied to the brain.  The methods used are those of
rhythmic stimulation (V. Ye. Mayorchik and B. G. Spirin, 1951; N. I. Zis-
lina, 1955; A. G. Kopylov, 1956, 1960, and others), and also the method of
change in the electrical activity of the brain during the action of a
rhythmic photic stimulus of increasing brightness  ("responsiveness curves,"
M. N. Livanov, 1944).  In these tests, the characteristics of the encepha-
lographic responses to stimuli are used to evaluate the indexes of the
condition of the brain.

     The method of electroencephalography with functional loading as applied
to the determination of permissible concentrations of atmospheric pollutants
was developed by A. D.  Semenenko (1963) and used by a number of researchers
(N.  B. Imasheva, 1963;  T. G. Tkachev, 1963; V. A. Chizhikov, 1963).

     To elucidate the influence of low concentrations of cyclohexanol and
cyclohexanone on the electrical activity of the brain, we used two methods:
the method of development of the electrocortical conditioned reflex, and the
method of electroencephalography with functional loading.  The electroencepha-
lographic studies were  made with a Kaiser 8-channel electroencephalograph with
an electrophotostimulator.

     During the examination, the subject was placed in a state of relative
rest in a special electrically shielded room equipped for these purposes.
During the devebopment  of the electrocortical conditioned reflex, the
unconditioned stimulus  was light causing desynchronization of the a rhythm,
and  the conditioned stimulus was the inhalation of various concentrations
of cyclohexanol and cyclohexanone.   The gas was supplied to the subject for
15 seconds, and the last five seconds v?ere reinforced with light.  The con-
ditioned reflex was considered formed and the concentration of the gas active
if desynchronization of the a rhythm occurred after a series of pairings
before the light was turned on.

     In the second method, the electrical activity of the subject's brain
was  recorded during exposure to intermittant light of changing intensity.
The  intensity of the flickering light changed every five seconds within a
range from 0.1 to 0.6 Joule over the course of 25 seconds of recording of
the  reinforced rhythm curve.  The reinforced rhythm curves were recorded
every minute.   After the third minute of the examination, a given concen-
tration of the gas studied was mixed in with the pure air fed into the
cylinder and breathed by the subject.  After the sixth minute, the gas
supply was discontinued, and a period of close and distant aftereffect was
                                   - 100 -

-------
 observed.   Usually, 11-12  reinforced rhythm curves were  recorded.  Thus,
 the  entire time of the study was  divided into four periods:  I - background,
 II - action of the gas, III -  close aftereffect, IV  -  distant aftereffect.
 Each period lasted 3 minutes.

      Each  curve was analyzed from the change of the  amplitude of the
 intrinsic  rhythm.   For convenience in carrying out the comparative analysis,
 the  total  amplitude for all the intensities was expressed in percent.  The
 average  amplitude  of the first three reinforced rhythm curves was taken as
 100%.

      The amplitude of reinforced  rhythm in the gas experiment was compared
with  the amplitude of assimilated rhythm in experiments with pure air.
 Data for different periods of the study were also compared.   The results
were  subjected to  statistical treatment.   The tests with  cyclohexanone
involved six  people and those with cyclohexanol, five  people.   The results
are  given  in  Tables 4 and 5.


                                                    Table 4
               Effect of Cyclohexanol on the Electrical Activity of the Brain.

Subject
V.
T. .•
S.
L.
M. '

Method
Rhythm
Reinforcement '
» >
» V
£o/uiitioned Reflex
j t
Concentration, mg/m*
0.2
+
+
+
0
0
" 0.14
	
—
0
-h
+
0.11
	
— •
—
+
+
O.OG
0
0
0
—
"
                Notation:  + action; - absence of action; 0 - not studied.


                                                     Table 5

              Effect of'Cyclohexanone on the Electrical Activity of the Brain.

Subj-ect

± •• •
N.
V. '
R.
L.
M.

Method
Rhythm
Reinforcement
» »
» >
» »
Conditioned Reflex
» »
Concentration, mg/m?
0.09

• -f-
—
+
+
0
0
o.oc

—
0
—
_
-f-
-(-
0.0'!

0
0
0'
0
—
• —
                Notation same as in Table 4.
                                    - 101 -

-------
      In  the study of  the influence  of cyclohexanol vapor inhalation on
the  change of the electrical activity of the brain,  concentrations of 0.2,
0.14,  0.11 and 0.06 mg/m3 were investigated.

      In  the study by  the method  of  reinforcement  of intrinsic  brain
potentials, a gas concentration  of  0.2 mg/m^ was  found to be  the threshold
value  for three people.   In two  out of three subjects, the  gas in this
concentration caused  a decrease  (Fig. 1) and in  one person, an increase  in
the  amplitude of the  imposed rhythm.   In 0.11 mg/nP concentration, the gas
did  not  cause any change in the  electrical activity of the brain in any  of
the  subjects.

      In  the study with the method of  development  of the electrocortical
conditioned reflex, a cyclohexanol  concentration  of 0.11 mg/m3 was found
to be  the threshold value in both subjects.  A  concentration  of 0.06 mg/m^
was  inactive.
         •H  C
         i—( -H
         Q.  fl)
               ;io-

               100-

               30-

               80-
                70


               Fig-

               1 -
  j	1	1	1	1	i	1	1	'	1	1	i—
  /   2   3   *    5   S    7   S   S   10  II  J2 '
             tj.r.e of examination,, minutes
 1.  Effect of cyclohexanol on the electrical activity of the
              brain in subject V.
pure air; 2 - concentration, 0.11 mg/m3; 3 - 0.14 mg/m ,
                4 - 0.20 mg/m'.
          o
           •o
          0> GJ
          •a o
          3 t,
w-
x^-
30-
10-
\ X '7
v 	 X/
• t
I2'31 5
"'-""" \
1 X-
i i i i
S 7 S S
£$*»*
W II 11
                             time of examination, minutes

               Fig. 2.  Effect of cyclohexanone on the electrical activity of the
                                brain in subject I.
               1 - pure air; 2 - concentration, 0.06 mg/m5; 3 - C.09 mg/m'.
                                       - 102  -

-------
     In  the study of  the influence  of  inhalation  of  cyclohexanone vapors
on  the electrical activity  of  the brain,  three  concentrations  were inves-
tigated: 0.09, 0.06 and 0.04 mg/nH.  In  the  investigation by  the method
of  reinforcement of intrinsic  brain potentials, a concentration of 0.09
mg/m3 was found to be  the threshold value for  three  people.   In two persons
this concentration caused a decrease and  in  one,  an  increase  (Fig. 2)  in
the amplitude of the  imposed rhythm.   The 0.09  mg/m^ gas  concentration was
found to be inactive  for one subject.

     Cyclohexanone in  0.06  mg/m^ concentration  caused no  change in the
electrical activity of the  brain in any  of the  subjects.   The  electrocorti-
cal conditioned reflex was  formed with the 0.06 mg/m3 concentration in both
subjects.  In this method,  a gas concentration  of 0.04 mg/m3 was found to
be inactive.
                                                       Table 6

            Thresholds of Action of Cyclohexanol and Cyclohexanone on Man.

Substance



Cyclo-
hexanol
Cyclo-
hexanone
Olfactory
Sensation
Thres-
hold


0.2k

0.21

Subthres-
hold


0.20

0.14

Light Sensitivity
of the Eye
Thres-
hold


Not
Deter-
mined
0.11

Subth res-
hold


Not
Deter-
mined
0.06

Electroencephalography
Rhythm
Reinforcement

Thres-
hold

0.20

0.09


Sub-
thres-
hold
0.14

0.06

Conditioned
Reflex

Thres-
hold

0.11

0.06

1
Sub-
thres-
hold
0.06

0.04

Highest
Maximum Per-
missible
Concentration,
mg/m5

0.06

0.04

     Thus, the concentrations of 0.06 mg/m^ of  cyclohexanol  and  0.04  mg/m^
of cyclohexanone did not cause a change in the  electrical  activity  of the
brain in any of the subjects.  Comparative data on  the  thresholds of  action
of the two substances are listed in Table 6.
                                Conclusions

     1.  The threshold of olfactory sensation in  the most  sensitive  persons
is 0:24 mg/m.3 for cyclohexanol and 0.21 mg/m^ for  cyclohexanone.

     2.  The threshold of change in the light sensitivity  of  the  eyes  during
inhalation of cyclohexanone vapors lies at a level of 0.11 mg/m.3.

     3.  The threshold of the reflex effect on the electrical  activity of
the brain for cyclohexanol lies at a level of 0.11 mg/m^ and  for  cyclohexanone
                                  -  103  -

-------
at a  level  of  0.06 mg/m^.

       4.   Both  substances  caused a  change in the electrical  activity  of
the brain in lower concentrations  when studied by  the method  of develop-
ment  of  the  electrocortical conditioned  reflex than when studied  by  the
method of reinforcement  of  intrinsic  brain  potentials.

       5.   Cyclohexanone has  lower thresholds of olfactory sensation and
of effect on the electrical activity  of  the brain.

       6.   The highest  single maximum permissible concentrations  in atmos-
pheric air v/hich we recommend  are  0.04 mg/m3 for cyclohexanone  and 0.06
mg/m^ for cyclohexanol.
                                      LITERATURE  CITED
                 G y m T y c n a K. A., FI o .1 c >i< a e u  E. cl>., C c M e ii e n K o A. J3,. Fur.
                   ii can., I960, JY M c K Ji c p B. A. fur. n can., 1960, ,\b •!, crp. 9.
                 3 ii c Ji ii u a H. 1-1. ^KypuaJi  ni.iciucfi  ncpniioii   ACfiTo.:u.!!OCTii  ic.iciin
                   H. n. llar.jiona, 1955, T. V, n. 5,  cip.'677.
                 M M a in c D a I-I. B.  Tur. n can., 1953, JVs  2, crp.  3.
                 ]\ o ii i.i  .M o r. A. T. OueiiKa  (jiyiiimnoiin.nwioro  COCTO;HI:M  ro.ioimoro
                   Moara :.:'CTO;IO.M ajicnTpoanucebaJiorpaijiii'iccKiix Kpnni.ix ycnocimn p;;r-
                   r,ia. B KM.: BOMJIOCL.; rcopini  11 upaKTiiiti:  3.icnTpo3!mc(l)a.norpn('pi!ii.
                •   .n.,'l95G, cip. 90,
                 K o ii M.Ji o n A. F. Mc'io/i. a:iCKTp03i!HCf|>a.'!orpa(!>!iliocKi!.\ Kpiioux  ycuo-
                   cinisi  pin-Ma nnn iisyiciuifi  ^:yiiKunona.i!.noro  cocioHir.in rojioniioro
                   v.oara 'ICJICIICK.T. B  KII.:  Bonpocbi 3.ncKTpot[ni3iio.ioniii  n siiuciji.i.io-
                   rpacl>iiii.  M.—JL, 19GO, 41.
                 JI a 3 a p c n II. B. HcajicuTpoJiiiTi,!. OIIUT Ciio.noro-fpissiiKO-xiiMiiiocKof:
                   1IX CMCTCMaTHKH. JI., 19;i4.
                 JI n n a  i! o n M. H. Kpnuwc a.icKTpii'iccKofi pcai;T!:r,iiocr:i Kopu  ro.nor,-
                   noro  Moura  >KIICOTIIIJX n  Mc.noncKa n nop.Mc n  naTO-ioriiM. l-Isncciii!!
                   AH CCCP.  CepiiJi Ciio.ioniii. 19-H, .K° G.  cip. 331, 339.
                 JI n  Ulan.. Fur. n can., 1061, A*; 8, CTp.  11.
                 JI o 6 Q u n K o r. a f.  B.  ripiiMciiciiiic Mctoaa yc.io::iiu.\ po(p.'icKcon ,a.ir:
                   OUCIIKIl TOKCIS'ICCKIIX KOllHCHTpaiUli'l  IlpOMWlll.'ICIIMI.-IX  HAOI1.  Tc3liCW
                   AOKJia/ion MO.iOAi.ix naynihix paCoTiiiiKOB. rop'uKiii'i.  195'1.
                 JI o 6 o ii i! !•: o ii r. T.  B., fl p c o 0 p a >u c n c K a n A-. A.  K uonpocy oo
                   OIICIIKC To;
-------
M ;i c n c n n n K o n A.  C.  OiipeAc.nciuic uiiK-'iorciccaiio/ia. OII|)CAC.:ICH:IC
   Ui:i;.'ioivi«Mi:on:i. B  KM.:  Oiipc.ac.nciinc Dpc;im.ix  UCIUCCTU  u no:i,iyxc
   npoi!nno;;.CT[ii;iiiii>i.s iio.MOinciiiii'i.  I'opi.Kiifi,  I9GO.
My xii TOD  !j. Al.  Alaiop:ia.ii,i K oGociioiianmo   upc/uvibiio AOiiycTii-
   .MOM  KoiiiicHTpauiiii  (j)cno.ia  u nT.\ioc(|)cpiio.M   iioa.'iyxc.  J^ncc.  i:aiiA.
   Al.,  1902.
OAOiiiniiiuii.il! /.I.  f.  AlaTCpiia.iu K  oOociionnmno  npeAC.-u-iio AO-
   iiyciiiMoi'i  Komeinpamm MCTii.ni c u  n.  F.  Biio.ioni'iccKoe ACMCTIIHC Ma^i.ix  KOMUciiTpam'.ri  aim-
   Aiinn  n  riiriicnii'iccKoc  3iia
-------
              ON THE COMBINED ACTION OF THREE MINERAL ACIDS


              Candidate of Medical Sciences V. P.  Melekhina
       Department of Communal Hygiene, Central Institute for Advanced Training of Physicians

From "Biologicheskoe deystvie i gigienicheskoe znachenie  atmosfernykh
zagryazneniy".  Pod redaktsiey Prof. V. A. Ryazanova i Prof. M.  S.  Gol'dberga.
Izdatel'stvo  "Meditsina" Moskva, p.  133-141,  (1966).

     The study of the  combined action  of various environmental  factors has
attracted the attention of many hygienists.   The necessity  of studies  of
this type has been emphasized in resolutions  of the 13th  and 14th  congresses
of hygienists.

     In recent years,  in connection with the  rapid growth  of the chemical
industry in the Soviet Union, studies  in the  area of hygienic standard-
ization of a  series of combinations  of atmospheric pollutants have  been
considerably  expanded.  The  combinations of sulfur dioxide  and  sulfuric
acid aerosol  (K. A. Bushtuyeva, 1961), chlorine and hydrogen chloride
(V. M. Styazhkin, 1962), and carbon  disulfide and hydrogen  sulfide
(B. K. Baykov, 1963) have been studied.  The  authors showed that in the
range of low  concentrations which may  occur in the air of populated areas,
the character of the action  of two atmospheric pollutants  is determined as
a total or partial summation.  However, the insufficient number of  studies
in this area  does not yet permit one to state that any combination  of
atmospheric pollutants will be characterized by an additive synergism.

     The object of the present study was to establish the nature of the
combined action of three mineral acids - sulfuric, nitric  and hydrochloric.
The study of  this combination is of practical importance, since the source
of their joint discharge into the atmosphere  are chemical  complexes and
inorganic fertilizer plants whose number and  capacity (particularly the
fertilizer plants) are increasing considerably in the Soviet Union.  The
combination under consideration is also of major scientific interest,
since all three acids  are strong electrolytes and in dilute solutions
dissociate completely  into hydrogen ions and  the corresponding  acid resi-
due.  The more dilute  the acid, the  less its  specific properties are mani-
fested and the more manifest are the properties common to  all the  acids,
due to the hydrogen ions.  In atmospheric  air at low concentrations of
these acids, we encountered  those properties  of the acids which are
characteristic of dilute solutions.  In this  connection,  the question  arises
whether mineral acids have an effect due solely to the hydrogen ion and
whether they  should therefore be standardized on the basis  of this  indicator
alone.  For example, can the concentration of acids be expressed in milli-
grams of hydrogen ion per m3 of air?   If one  could obtain a confirmation of
this hypothesis, the control of the purity of atmospheric air in populated
areas would be considerably simplified.
                                 - 106 -

-------
     To achieve the stated objective, we used methods widely employed in
 the hygienic standardization of maximum permissible concentrations of
 atmospheric pollutants.  These were the methods of determination of the
 threshold of olfactory sensation and the very sensitive method of dark
 adaptation.

     The experiments were conducted by using a procedure recommended by
 the Committee on the Sanitary Protection of Atmospheric Air.

     In determining the precise concentrations of the volatile acids in
 the experiment, xve could not use their determination from the correspond-
 ing anions, since in addition to the anions of these acids, anions of their
 corresponding salts are also present in air and are therefore determined.
 On the other hand, we found it impossible to use the microtitrimetric method
 of determination of hydrochloric acid (M. V. Alekseyeva, 1963) because of its
 inadequate sensitivity.  For this reason, in collaboration with Candidate of
 Biological Sciences M. D. Manita, we worked out a spectrophotometric method
 of determination of mineral acids in the presence of their salts.  The method
 is based on the measurement of the optical density of colored aqueous solu-
 tions of the acids in the presence of a 0.01% alcohol solution of methyl red.
 The color depends on the pH of these solutions in the range from 5.3 to 4.3,
vrtiich corresponds to a concentration of hydrochloric acid from 0.18 to 1.83
 yg/ml, nitric acid from 0.31 to 3.15 yg/ml, and sulfuric acid from 0.24 to
 2.4 )Jg/ml.  The sensitivity of the determination of hydrochloric acid was
 0.18 yg/ml, sulfuric acid 0.24 yg/ml, and nitric acid 0.31 yg/ml.

     Other acids and alkalis interfere with the determination.  Sulfuric
 acid in amounts up to 1 mg/m-^ and carbon dioxide in amounts up to 0.05
vol.  % do not interfere.

     Optimum conditions were selected for the spectrophotometric analysis:
 the aqueous solutions of the acid were determined in the visible region of
 the spectrum at Ymax = 530 my in a cell with a thickness of 1 cm.  A cali-
bration graph was plotted for each acid.

     The samples were collected by using a procedure recommended by
M. V.  Alekseyeva, i.e., into double-distilled water in a V-shaped absorber
with a porous plate at a rate of 0.5-1 1/min.

     In starting the work we considered the fact that sulfuric and hydro-
 chloric acids had been standardized for the atmosphere of populated areas
 (0.3 and 0.05 mg/m^).  We had to check the data obtained earlier and in
 the case of discrepancies, to introduce corrections.  The influence of
 low concentrations of nitric acid had not been studied and its maximum
permissible concentration for atmospheric air had not been established.
                                  -  107 -

-------
     We began  the study of the effect of low  concentrations of  the  acids
on  the human organism with the determination  of  their  thresholds  of
olfactory sensation.  The observations were made  on  16 people 17  to 36  years
of  age.  A total of over 800 tests were conducted (including 415  for the
determination  of the threshold of olfactory sensation  of hydrochloric acid,
243 for nitric acid, and 148 for sulfuric acid).   Results  of the  determina-
tion are listed in Table 1.

     Thus, the thresholds of olfactory sensation  for the most sensitive
persons were found to be 0.70 mg/m3  for nitric acid, 0.39  mg/m3 for hydro-
chloric acid,  and 0.60 mg/m3 for sulfuric acid.

                                                      Table  1

                     Thresholds of Olfactory Sensation of Mineral Acids.
Number of
Subjects
Threshold Concentrations
ng/nr
' H+, mg/m3
Subthreshold Concentrations
tng/m5
H+, mg/m5
Nitric Acid
1
3
7
I
1
1 .
1
0.70
0,80
0,85
0,90
. 1,07
1,25
. 1.50
0,01099
0.01256
0,01334-
0.01413
0.01679
0.01962
0,02355
0,60 :
0,70'
0,70]
0.85
0,85
1.07
" 1,40]
0,00942
0.01099
0,01099
0,01334
0,0133-!
0,01679
0,02198
Hydrochloric Acid
3
7
3
0.39
0.40
0,45
0,01053 .
0,01080
0,01215
0,30
0,32
0,40
0,0081
0,0086
0.010S
Sulfuric Acid
2
8
1
0,60
0.74
0,81
0,0120
0,0148
0.0162
0,43
0,00
0,74
0, 0096
0,0120
0,0148
     The thresholds were equal in hydrogen ion concentrations:   for nitric
acid - 0.01099 mg/m3, for hydrochloric acid - 0.01053 mg/m3,  and for
sulfuric acid - 0.0120 mg/m3.  As is evident from the data  cited,  the  figures
defining the thresholds of olfactory sensation in hydrogen  ion  concentrations
are rather close to each other.

     The subthreshold concentrations of the acids were found  to be as
follows:  for nitric acid 0.60 mg/m3, for hydrochloric acid 0.30 mg/m3,  and
for sulfuric acid 0.43 mg/m3; in hydrogen ion concentrations  this  corresponds
to 0.00942, 0.0081, and 0.0096 mg/m3.  Essentially, it may  be said that  these
figures are of the same order.
                                    - 108 -

-------
     The  results  of  our studies  differ from the data on the threshold of
olfactory  sensation  of  hydrochloric acid obtained earlier by Ye. V.
Yelfimova.   Unfortunately,  we  do not know the reason for this, but we can
surmise  that a  factor is our use of a more sensitive method of determina-
tion of  the  acids.

     The  threshold concentrations of olfactory sensation of sulfuric acid
are essentially no different from the existing literature data (K. A. Bush-
tuyeva,  1961).  Having  determined the thresholds of olfactory sensation
separately for each  acid, we undertook the determination of the thresholds
in different combinations.   Initially, we studied the threshold of olfactory
sensation  of a  combination  of  the too acids - nitric and hydrochloric.
Twelve people participated  in  the experiments.   A total of 86 determinations
were made.   Nine  combinations  were studied.  The results are given in Table
2.  The concentrations  of the  acids are expressed in fractions of the thres-
hold concentrations  for each acid observed and are summed up.

     All the perceptible concentrations in terms of the hydrogen ions were
above 0.01 mg/m^.  All  the  imperceptible combinations in terms of the
hydrogen ion xvere found to  be  below 0.01 mg/m3.   Analyzing the data from
the standpoint of the combined action of the acids we can state that we
are dealing  with  a simple summation.


                                                  Table 2

                Thresholds of Olfactory Sensation of the Sura  of the Two Acids
                             (Nitric and Hydrochloric).             . .

Subject
N.
M.
S.
G.
E.
T.
B.
K.
L.
.YiU
• B.
. A.

Threshold. Concentrations
Sum of
Fractions
1,17
LOG
LOG
• 0,97
0,99
0,99 .
1,0
1,1-1
•1,10
0,99
1,0
0,99

Sum of Acids
in H+tmg/m?)
0,0176-!
0,01201
0,01283
0,01283
0,01283
0,0120.1
0,01283
0,01332
0,01283
0-, 01 20-1
0,0120-1
0,01282

Subthreshold Concentrations
Sura of
Fractions
0,SG
0,76
0.9S
0,G9
0,76
0,76
0,93
0,71
0,71
0,76 '
0,77
Sum of Acids
in H+Cmg/V)
0.0083G3'
0,003353 •
0,0120-10 •
0,008363 '
0,008353
0,008363
0,008363
0,008-165
0,003-1 65
0,008363
0,008363
0,69 t 0,008363
t
     The olfactory sensation threshold  of  the  sum  of  the  three  acids was
determined on nine people.  A  total of  83  observations were  made and ten
pairings of different combinations of the  three  acids were studied.   The
results are given in Table 3.
                                  - 109 -

-------
                                                    Table 3

               .Olfactory Sensation Threshold of the Sum of the Three Acids.

Subject
N.
M.
S.
Ch.
.E.
T.
B.
K.
L. '
Threshold Combinations
Sum of
Fractions
0,98
1,14
1,1-1
1,10
1,06
1.13
1.01
1.16
0,99
Sun of Acids
in
H* (mg/m3)
0,01103
0,01555
0,01555
0,01565
0,01555
0,01555
0,01268
0,01573
0,01268
Subthreshold Combinations
Sum of
Fractions
0,96
0,93
0,93
0,78
0,88
0.81
0,88
0,96
0,94
Sum of Acids
in
H* (mg/ra5)-
0,01101
0,01187
0,01187
0,01103
0,01187
0,01103
0,01103
0,01187
0,00870
      It  is  clear  from Table  3 that  a perceptible combination of acids was
 that  in  which  the sum of  the fractions  of threshold concentrations exceeded
 unity.   All the imperceptible combinations were those in which the sum was
 less  than unity.   On  the  basis  of  the data obtained it may be concluded
 that  the threshold concentration of the  sum of  the three acids for the most
 sensitive persons in  terms of the hydrogen ion  is  0.01103 mg/m3.

      Thus,  the threshold  concentrations  obtained,  expressed in hydrogen ions
 of the individual acids,  as  well as  of  combinations of two and three acids,
 are almost  at  the same  level.   This  is  to say,  the principal physiological
 effect in terms of the  threshold of  olfactory sensation is due to the con-
 centration  of hydrogen  ions  in  the  solutions of these acids.

      The next stage of  the present  study  consisted in investigating the
 reflex effect of  the mineral acids  on the light sensitivity of the eye.
 The tests were conducted  on  three people,  17, 22 and  32 years  old.

      The thresholds of  olfactory sensation of all  three acids  were  deter-
mined for two subjects, and  that of  sulfuric acid  only was determined for
 the third subject  (Table  A).

      The investigations of dark adaptation were started with  the  determina-
 tion  of  the individual  thresholds for each acid separately,  and then for
 their mixture.  The estimate  of the  influence of the  total acids  was also
expressed in fractions  of the threshold values.  The  gas was  inhaled start-
ing with the 15th minute  of  adaptation for 4 1/2 minutes.   As  a result  of
 the study, the thresholds listed in  Table  6 were established.
                                   - 110 -

-------
                                                            Table 4
                   Thresholds of Olfactory Sensation of Acids in Persons
                         Participating in Adaptometric Tests.
Subject
T.
K.
R.
Threshold Concentrations of Acids
Nitric
mg/m5
0.85
0.80
H4', ng/m5
0.01354
0.01256
Hydrochloric
mg/ra^
0.40
0.40
H+, mg/m5
0.0108
0.0108
Sulfuric
mg/m^ H+, mg/m5
0.74 0.0148
0.74 0.0148
0.73 0.0146
      Comparing  the  results of the  determination of the  thresholds of
 olfactory sensation and thresholds  of  the reflex effect (Tables 4 and  5),
 one  can observe  that  they are essentially quite similar.   In this respect
 our  results are  in  complete agreement  with the data obtained earlier in  a
 study of the acids  by  other authors  (K.  A. Bushtuyeva,  1961; Ye. V. Yelfi-
 mova, 1962; V. M. Styazhkin, 1962).
                                                       Table 5
                      Threshold Concentrations of Acids Determined by the
                                 Dark Adaptation Method.
                                    Concentrations of Acids
Subject
T.
K.
R.
Nitric
mg/m5
0,SGT(c)
0,85 (a)
0,84 (b)
H+, n)g/m3
0.0135
0,0133
0,0131
Hydrochloric
mg/ta'
0,10 (b)
0,40 (a)
0,42 (b)
H+, rag/m?
0,0108
0,0108
0,0113
Sulfuric
rag/m3
0,80 (c)
0,81 (b)
0,73 (b)
•!+, mg/m^
0,0160
0,0161
0,0146
                  Note.  Confidence factor:  a - 95$, b - 99$, c - 99-9$.
     We  then studied  the  influence of inhalation of different combinations
of  the  three acids on  the dark adaptation.   The effect was  estimated in
the same  manner as was  indicated in the  determination of  the  threshold of
olfactory sensation.  The data obtained  are  listed in Table 6.

     The  active combination  of acids was  found to be the  one  in which the
sum of  the fractions of the  threshold concentrations exceeded unity.
                                     - Ill  -

-------
                                                      Table 6

                Effect of Inhalation of the Sum of the Three Acids on Dark
                   Adaptation in the 20th Minute of the Experiment.
Subject
T.
R.
K.
Note. Con
Sum of Acid Fractions
of Threshold Values > 1
Light Sensi-
tivity in
Percent of
Background
130 (a)
78 (c)
140.4 (p)
fidence factor
Concentra-
tion of Sum
of Acids in
H+, mg/mJ
0.02070
0.02018
0.01908
a - 95*, b
Sum of Acid Fractions
of Threshold Values < 1
Light Sensi-
tivity in
Percent of
Background
117.5
94.4
97
- 99%, c - 99.9?!
Concentra-
tion of Sum
of Acids in
H+, mg/m3
0.01057
0.01158
0.00625
;.
                                 Conclusions

      1.   The  established thresholds of olfactory sensation of nitric,
sulfuric  and  hydrochloric acids are respectively equal to 0.70, 0.60 and
0.40  mg/m3, which  in terms  of the hydrogen ion per cubic meter corresponds
to 0.01099, 0.01203 and 0.01053 mg/m3.

      2.   A mixture of two and three acids is perceived when the sum of  the
fractions  of  their threshold values exceeds unity.  The perceptible con-
centrations expressed in hydrogen ions per cubic meter are above 0.01
mg/m^.

      3.  The  threshold concentrations of the reflex effect, studied by
the dark  adaptation method,  lie at the level of the threshold values, or
slightly  above,  for olfactory sensation.  The combined action manifests
itself as  a type of additive synergism.

      4.  Our  data  are in good agreement  with the assumption that the reflex
effect of  mineral  acids  (nitric,  sulfuric and hydrochloric) in the atmos-
pheric air of populated  areas is  determined by the concentration of the
hydrogen ions.

      5.  The  results  of  the  studies make it possible  to propose that the
contamination of atmospheric air  by the  mineral acids which we studied be
evaluated  on  the basis of the concentration of hydrogen ions alone, inde-
pendently  of  the anionic residue  of the  acid.

     6.  The highest  single  maximum permissible concentration of the sum
of these acids and  separately for each acid in terms  of the hydrogen ion
should not exceed 0.010  mg/m.3.
                                   - 112 -

-------
                     LITERATURE  CITED
A .1 c K c c c o a  M.  B. Onpc.ae.icni!c  x.iopiicroro ucaopo.ia —
  co.iMiiofi  Kiic.noTiii  Onpc,o.e:icni!c aTMOCtbcpm.ix   sarpfniieimfi,   1963,
  CTJ).  28—31.
B a ii K o ii  5. K.  Fur.  n  can., 1963",^ 3, crp. 3—S.
b y 111 T y c D a  K.  A. Honwe  Aamibic  o pctji.ncKTOpiio.M .iciicTiiim cepiii'.-
  croro  rnaa n  a3po?o.'in ccpiiofi KIIC.IOTU na "ic.noneKa.  ripc.T.c.ii.!!o .T.O-
  nycTii.Muc Kciinciiipnu.1111   ar.MOCijicpiiiiix   sarpjisneinifi,   19G1,  ». 5,
 ^cip.  118—126.                    .   '
E .1 <}) n M o  D a  E.  B.  Marepna.Tb! K nii'iiciiii'iecKori   onciiiic
  co.:i5inoii Kiic.iOTii! (x.iopiiCToro noAOpo.ia)  ic
  HHTe.na. npejc.iMio  .lonyciiiMMc KoimcitTpatuiii aiMoccJicpnux sarpus-
  nciiiifi, 1962, n.  6, crp.  31— 49.
M a 11 n T a  M. A.,  Me.TexiniaB.il.  Tur.   11  can.,  196-!,   ». 3,
  crp.  53—56.   •
CTO/KXIIII B. M. Maicpna.'iH K riiriicni!'iccKo:.iy oCociionaiuiio  npc-.
  Ao.ibiio AonycTiiMux Konnciirpaniiii  x.nopa n  x.iopiicroro   noAopo.ia
  npii  nx COUMCCTIIOK npiicyrcTnnii B  aiMOcAcpnoM no3,iyxc. FlpCAC.-.h-
  110 AonycTiiMLie  Koiinciirpaumi arMocibepHux  snrpjisiicniii'i, 1962, B. 6,
  crp.  96-105.
                           -  113  -

-------
                    TOXICITY OF SULFUR OXIDES UNDER CONDITIONS

                         OF LONG-TERM CONTINUOUS EXPOSURE


                             Decent K. A. Bushtuyeva
                             Department of Communal Hygiene,
                     Central Institute for Advanced Training of Physicians

From "Biologicheskoe deystvie i gigienicheskoe  znachenie  atmosfernykh
zagryazneniy".  Pod redaktsiey Prof. V. A. Ryazanova  i Prof. M.  S.  Gol'dberga.
Izdatel'stvo "Meditsina" Moskva, p. 142-172,  (1966).

     This paper presents materials and results  of studies with various  con-
centrations of sulfur dioxide, sulfuric acid  aerosol, and their  combinations
under conditions of extended continuous exposure.  The studies were made  on
white rats in seven series of experiments.  A total of 120  animals, with  15
in each series and the control group, were used.  The sulfuric acid aerosol
used in our experiments had a particle size of  less than  2  y.  The  following
tests were utilized to study the resorptive effect of sulfur oxides:  behavior
and weight of the animals, ratio of chronaxias  of antagonistic muscles, whole
blood cholinesterase, serum protein fractions,  content of coproporphyrins in
the animals' urine, and pathomorphological studies following the  completion
of exposure.

     Tests x^ith sulfur dioxide.  The toxicity of sulfur dioxide has been
dealt with in many studies, but the majority  of the latter  cannot be dis-
cussed in this present paper, since they deal with very high concentrations.
They will therefore be omitted here.

     We studied the resorptive effect of sulfur dioxide on white  rats in
two series of experiments under conditions of continuous exposure in the
course of 65 days.  The actual concentrations for each series were  (M i CJ)
in series I, 4.86 ± 1.26 mg/m3, and in series II, 8.53 — 2.1 mg/m3.  The
air samples were taken from the chambers and  analyzed daily.  The indicated
sulfur dioxide concentrations did not affect  the behavior or weight of  the
animals.

     The chronaxia of the antagonist muscles  of the right hind limb was
examined every ten days according to the usual procedure with the aid of
an ISE-01 electronic stimualtor.  This method has been widely adopted in
the practice of hygienic studies for the substantiation of maximum  permis-
sible concentrations (R. V. Borisenkova, 1954; Chzhao Chzhen-tsi, 1959;
V. A. Gofmekler, 1961; Yu. G. Fel'dman, 1962; V. A. Chizhikov, 1963, and
others) as the method for studying the state  of the central nervous system.

     Data on the ratio of chronaxias of extensors to  flexors are presented
                                    - 114 -

-------
 in  Fig.  1.   As we know, the normal  ratio,  which is a relatively constant
 value  ranging from 1.15 to 1.30, does not  always remain greater than
 unity.   Under the influence of various  factors, these normal ratios may
 change,  and in the presence of deep shifts,  become inverted and fall below
 unity.

     As  is  evident from Fig. 1, sulfur  dioxide in the concentrations studied
 affects  the central nervous system.  The changes in the presence of the
 8.53 mg/m^  sulfur dioxide concentration were more pronounced, more constant,
 and statistically more reliable.  Recovery of the initial ratio was observed
 only 17  days after the completion of exposure.   At a lower concentration
 (4.86  mg/m^) ,  the changes were less constant and rapidly returned to the
 initial  values after the exposure was discontinued.
in >.J'
CO
3 '•'•
§ ...
t-, '•'
s:
° >,#•
t«*
• H
•*•* • 03-
cU ' •
ce .


J^-7^
-..-*""-^""



.






x\
~^c;r,*V^£<^"1S"
C





;
>^*^P._- — — .
*•*' / "^ '

/
-^^
"**C




                                Time of observation
                Fig. 1.  Ratio of chronaxias of antagonist muscles in animals
                exposed to sulfur dioxide.
                AB - period of exposure; 1 - control group, 2 - series I (4.86
                irg/m3); 3 - series II (8.53 mg/m5); a, b, c - confidence factor
                of the changes (respectively 95, 99 and 99.9$).
     We studied  the  activity of whole blood  cholinesterase by Pokrovskiy's
method  (1953)  modified by Martynova  (1957).   Recently,  this method has
also been widely  adopted in studies  of the influence of chemical substances,
and has proven highly sensitive and  reliable  (G.  I.  Solomin, 1961; R. Ubay-
dullayev, 1961,  and  others).  The cholinesterase  activity was determined  in
five rats of each series and control group at 15-day intervals (Table 1).

     A  decrease  in the time of decomposition  of  acetylcholine chloride  and
hence,  an increase in cholinest.erase activity was observed in both series
as early as the  first determination  follox^ing the start of exposure, i.e.,
on the  13th day.   This increase grew during  the  exposure and reached its
highest values toward its end.  The  recovery  of  cholinesterase activity was
gradual and reached  the background values only on the 17th day following
the end of exposure.

-------
                                                     Table 1
             Time of Decomposition of Acetylcholine Chloride of Whole Blood of
                          Rats Exposed'to Sulfur-Dioxide.
Date of
Investigation
Background on the basis of 17
•determinations '...
Exposure. 23/1V
7/V
2!/V
4/VI
Recovery period 18/VI
29/VI
Concentration, mg/ra'
series I
4.86
41,1
35,6 (a)
35,4 (c)
31,8 (c)
25,8 (c)
38,8 (a)
40,4 •
series II
8.55 "
41,4
32,0 (c)
32,6 (c)
25,7 (c)
24.2 (c)
3G.2 (c)
40,6
Note.
.  a -
                          and ff., the
                          *, c - 99.$
confidence factor of the changes is:
as compared with the background.
      The protein  fractions of the blood serum were  determined by  paper
electrophoresis followed by recording of the phoregrams on photographic
paper and weighing  of  the sections  of individual  fractions.  The  percent
content  of each fraction was determined from the  weight.  The determina-
tion  was made every  20 days in five  rats'of each  group (Table 2).

                                                        Table 2

                 Protein Fractions of the Blood Serum in Percent During Exposure
                               ' ' to'Sulfur Dioxide.
Period of
Observation
Background
Exposure
Recovery
Fraction
A Ibumins •
° - Globulins
" • -Globulins
7 • Globulins
Albumins
a - 'Globulins
?' ~ -Globulins
7 ' Globulins
Albumins
a - Globulins
? - Globulins
7 " Globulins
Concentration, mg/rn^
Control
40,20
18,1
24,1
17,6
40,4.
' 17,7
25,5
16,9
38,2
18,7
25,6
18,4
Series I
4.86
40,25
18,1
24,1
17,6
35,8 (b)
17,5
27,0 (b)
19,6 (a)
35,3 (c)
19,5
24,6
20,5
Series II
8.55
40,26
18,1
24,1
17,6
37,8
14,8 (b)
28,6 (c)
18,7
32,2 (b)
19,4
26,8
21,6
     In  the  control group  of animals,  there were no  reliable changes  during
any of the periods as  compared with the  background,  whereas under  the in-
fluence  of sulfur dioxide,  a decrease  of the percent content of  albumins and
a corresponding increase of the globulin fractions,  particularly $ globulins,
took place.
                                   -  116  -

-------
     To evaluate  the  degree  of  influence  of different sulfur dioxide con-
 centrations  on  the protein  fractions,  Table 3 lists  data during the exposure
 and  recovery  periods  in  percent of  the background concentrations.   The table
 shows  that at the 4.86 mg/rn^ concentration changes are observed in the per-
 cent content  of albumin,  (3  globulin,  and  y globulin  fractions, whereas at
 the  8.53 mg/my  concentration there  is  a shift in all the fractions.
                                                     Table 3

                Change in Protein Fractions Under the Influence of Sulfur Dioxide
                            in Percent of Original Values._
Series
1(4.86 ms/m3)
11(8,53 mg/m3)
Exposure
Albu-
mins
11,1
6,2
Globulins
a
0
18,3
P
12,0
18,6
•••
11.3
6,2
Recovery Period
Albu-.
mins
12, '1
20.0
Globulins
a
0
0
p
0
0
{
0
22,7
     The last index, which we used  to  evaluate  the  effect of sulfur dioxide,
was the excretion of coproporphyrins in  the  urine.   As  an indicator of the
general biological shift in  the  organism,  this  method has lately begun to
be extensively applied to the substantiation of maximum permissible concen-
trations of atmospheric pollutants  (G. I.  Solomin,  1962;  B.  G.  Odoshashyili,
1963; V. A. Chizhikov, 1963; P.  G.  Tkachev,  1963).

     The coproporphyrins. were determined in  a 24-hour portion of urine
collected from five rats of  each series  every ten days.   A quantitative
determination was carried out by using a spectrophotometric method
(Yu. K. Smirnov, M. I. Gusev, 1956).

     The data obtained are shown in Fig. 2,  where data  on the excretion of
coproporphyrins by animals of the control  group (M  i. 3a)  are crosshatched.
As can be seen from Fig. 2,  the  8.53 rng/m-^ concentration  of sulfur dioxide
causes an increase in the content of coproporphyrins  excreted in the urine
as early as four weeks after the start of  exposure.   At  the 4.86 mg/m^ sul-
fur dioxide concentration, this  increase is  already observed 1  1/2 months
from the start of exposure.  The change  in the  content  of coproporphyrins
in both series was found to  be unstable, and disappeared  on the 9th day after
the exposure was discontinued.

     Autopsy of animals subjected to the action of  sulfur dioxide in 4.86
mg/m-* concentration immediately  after  exposure  did  not  show any pathologico-
anatomical changes.  The internal organs and brain  of the rats  were sub-
jected to histopathological  analysis.  Microscopic  examination  of the lungs
of all the rats of this series showed  the  presence  of small foci of inter-
stitial pneumonia and of emphysema  in  the  adjoining areas (Fig.  3), a slight
swelling of the collagenous  fibers  in  the  adventitia of  the blood vessels
                                  - 117 -

-------
and bronchi,  and in  some  cases  a catarrhal-desquamative bronchitis.  The
elastic  fibers  in  the  stroma of the lung were evenly distributed over the
entire cross  section.   Substantial changes were observed in the trachea of
the animals:  desquamation  of the mucous membrane, and lumps of mucopurulent
content  in the  lumen of the trachea.   Examination of the cerebral cortex
revealed a subdued hyperchromatism of individual pyramidal neurons of layer
V of the cortex, turbidity  of the cytoplasm, and small foci of gliosis.  The
cerebellum showed  angularity and wrinkling of the Purkinje cells.  Golgi
staining in the top  layers  of the cortex, primarily in layer III, showed the
apical dendrites of  certain pyramidal neurons to be devoid of spinelike
processes and to have  swellings and beaded thickenings.  Neurons arranged in
rows were unchanged.   Such  changes were absent in animals sacrificed at the
end of the recovery  period.
            to
            8
                               Time of Observation
              Fig. 2.  Content of coproporphyrins in the urine of experimental
              animals exposed to the action of sulfur dioxide.
                           Notation same as in Fig. 1.
     Autopsy of animals subjected  to the action of sulfur dioxide in
8.53 mg/m3 concentration, sacrificed immediately after the exposure was com-
pleted, did not show  any macroscopic changes.   Small foci of pneumonia and
hyperemia of the spleen were  found in rats killed at the end of the recovery
period.

     Microscopic examination  of  the lungs showed areas of interstitial
pneumonia, emphysema  in the adjoining areas,  and catarrhal-desquamative
bronchitis.  The elastic fibers  in the injured areas of the lung frequently
appeared broken, coiled and spiral.   The collagenous fibers in the adventitia
of the blood vessels  and bronchi were swollen.  Toward the end of the recovery
period, the number of histiocytes  filled with  the pigment increased.  In the
                                  - 118-

-------
 trachea,  there  was  necrosis and desquamation of the mucosa over a large
 area  (Fig.  4),  and  hyperplasia of the mucosa with papillomatosis.   The
 lumen  of  the  trachea had a purulent content and blood  clots.   There was
 hyperplasia of  the  lymphatic follicles of the submucosa.
                                                        f

                  Fig. 3.  Lung of white rat No. 5 of- series I. Diffuse
                  thickening of interalyeolar septa caused by infiltration
                  of cellular elements into them. Staining with hematoxylin-
                            eosin. Magnification 20x5.

     The  liver had areas of dystrophy, and the heart, fine and  isolated
blood extravasations  in the myocardium.  No changes were established in the
kidneys or other  organs.   In the cerebral cortex, the cloudiness  of  the
cytoplasm and hyperchromatism of certain pyramidal neurons of layers II and
V of the  cortex were  noted.  There were isolated and small foci of  gliosis,
and, in the  cerebellum, areas of fallout and hyperchromatism of the  Purkinje
cells.  The  medulla oblongata had no special characteristics.

     When Golgi staining was  used, individual neurons whose apical  dendrites
were devoid  of spines and had beaded thickenings and swellings  (Fig. 5) were
found among  the cells of different layers more often than in animals of
series I.  In animals sacrificed at the end of the recovery period,  the
changes were considerably evened out.

     Studies with  sulfuric acid aerosol.  The high toxicity of  sulfuric acid
aerosol as compared with that of sulfur dioxide has been demonstrated by
several investigators (Treon et al.,  1949; Amdur, 1953, and others).

     Our  early work (K.  A.  Bushtuyeva, 1956, 1961) indicates that changes  in
the pulmonary tissue  such as  interstitial pneumonia with a change in the
content of histamine  are observed at  a sulfuric acid aerosol concentration of
                                      - 129  -

-------

                   Fig. 4.  Trachea of white rat No. 24 from series II.
                   Necrosis and desquamation of mucosa over a large area.
                   Staining with hematoxylin-eosin. Magnification -
                                - magnifying glass.



1 mg/m3 and  after a continuous exposure of 120  hours.  When the exposure  lasted

one  month, the initial symptoms of irritation  of  the pulmonary tissue are  also

observed at  a concentration as low as 0.1  mg/m3.
                      -
                     ?;'-*

                     Fig. 5.  Brain of rat No. 17 of series II.  Apical
                     dendrites of neurons are devoid of spines and have
                     beaded thickenings and swellings.  Golgi staining.
                     Magnification 40x10.
     The present  investigations were conducted in  two series  on white rats.
The actual concentrations  of sulfuric acid aerosol in the  chambers were
1.04 ± 0.057 mg/m3 (series III) and 1.8 ± 0.162 mg/m3 (series IV).   The same
tests  as in the preceding  series  I and II  were employed.
                                      -  120 -

-------
      Data on the weight of the  animals did not  shoxj any substantial changes.

      Results of the  study of the  ratio of chronaxies of antagonist muscles
for  animals of series  III and IV  are shown in Fig.  6.   A disturbance of
the  normal ratio under the influence of sulfuric  acid  aerosol  occurred in
animals of both series only a month  after the start of exposure.   In animals
of series III, it  is preferable to speak of a convergence of the  chronaxies,
and  in  those of series IV, of an  inversion of the normal ratio.   Results of
the  determination  of  cholinesterase  activity in animals of series III and
IV are  presented in  Table 4.

in
CO
•H
X
cc
c
o ,
[_
c.
o
«-.
0
o
•H
CO
fr.



/.<"•


'./•
» <7

/?/-
^/-







N-v'' Xx^






•vv . ^. — _^_ ,: _—•*,,
''*•*£''' 	 ""-5'
v"x,-'' \ /
b 'v'


i





/ "~^
/ *'
/ f' I
/
'



                                  Time of observation
                  Fig. 6. Ratio of chronaxias of antagonist muscles in animals
                            exposed to sulfuric acid aerosol.    ,
                  AB - period of exposure; 1 - series III (1.04 mg/m ); 2 - series
                  IV (1.8 mg/m5); a, b, c - confidence factor of the changes
                  (95, 99 and 99.9$ respectively).
     Thus,  sulfuric  acid aerosol in  the  concentrations studied,  like sulfur
dioxide,  causes a decrease in the  time of decomposition of acetylcholine
chloride, i.e., an increase in cholinesterase activity.  The recovery of the
activity  took place  only six days  after  the completion of exposure.
                                                         Table 4
                Time of Decomposition of Acetylcholine Chloride of Whole Blood of
                         Rats F-xposed to Sulfuric. _Acid .Aerosol.

Date of

Background on the
4 determinations

Exposure

Recovery period


Investigation

basis of
23/1V
7/V
21 IV.
4 IV I
18/Vi
29/VI
Concentrations^ mg/m'
Series in
' 1.0
41.8
-10,6
37,4 (c)
36, S (c)
34,0 (c)
•12,0
40,0
Series IV
1.8 '
40,5
37,8 (c)
33,6 (n)
30,0 (c)
30,0 (c)
41.0
40.0
                                      - 121  -

-------
      Results of a study of the  total blood serum protein in animals  of
 series  III and IV showed no statistically  reliable changes when  compared
 with  the background data.  The  ratio of  the protein fractions changed
 significantly, however.  At the same time, there was a decrease  in the
 percent  content of albumins and an increase in $ globulins without a
 change  in the other fractions  (Table 5).
                                                Table 5
               Protein Fractions of the Blood Serum (in Percent) During Exposure
                            to Sulfuric Acid Aerosol.
Period of
. Observation
Background



Exposure

Fractions

a -
P-
7'-

a -
P-

Recovery period


7-
a -
P-
7-
Albumins
Globulins
Globulins
Globulins
Albumins
Globulins
.Globulins
•Globulins
Albumins
Globulins
Globulins
Globulins
Concentrations, mg/m
Series III
1.0
'10,26
18,1
2-1,1
17,6
3.1 , 2 (c)
18,6
27, 3 (a)
18,7
3G,5
17,5
27,1
18,9
Series IV
1.3
40.26
18,1
2-1,1
17,6
33,6 (c)
17,7
29, 1 (c)
19,6
33, 8 (c)
20,05
26,2
19,95
                                                      Table 6
                  Change in the Albumin-(3 ^Globulin Ratio During Exposure to
                               Sulfuric Acid Aerosol.
Series
HI. )
IV J
Background
1.G7

Exposure
. I,lS-l(c)
1,181 (c)
Recovery Period
1,3-16
1,380
     As is evident  from Table 6, a considerable  decrease of the albumin-6-
globulin ratio  takes  place under the influence of  Sulfuric acid aerosol.

     Interesting  results were obtained in experiments  on animals of series
III and IV with administration of coproporphyrins  (Fig.  7).  The amount of
coproporphyrins is  expressed in micrograms per 100  g of  animal weight.  The
interval within the range of the physiological norm has  been crosshatched.
     As is evident  from the data cited, sulfuric  acid  aerosol in 1.8
concentration  (series  IV)  caused a marked increase  in  the amount of copro-
porphyrins only  seven  days after the start of exposure.   At the end of the
first month, the  amount of coproporphyrins reached  3.139 yg per 100 g for
an average norm  of  0.305 yg per 100 g.  However,  this  index gradually
                                    - 122 -

-------
 decreased,  and 1 1/2 months later corresponded to the physiological norm.
 A fresh  increase was observed toward the end of the exposure.   This course
 was  approximately repeated by the curve of excretion of  coproporphyrins
 for  series  III as well, but a sharp increase was first observed only one
 month  and eight days after the start of exposure.
                           /                        B  '
              o
              0
              T 0,6-
0.2-
                   ^//  %  %   7/y   %  ?S/v   ?/V,  %   %  %

                                Time of  observation
                 Fig. 7. Content of coproporphyrins in the urine of rats
                         exposed to sulfuric acid aerosol.
                           Notation same as in Fig. 6.

     A pathomorphological  analysis of animals of series III, sacrificed
both immediately after exposure and at the end of the recovery period,
showed the presence  of focal  pneumonia in the lungs and congestion  of  the
spleen.

     Microscopic analysis  of  the lungs revealed interstitial pneumonia
with swelling of collagenous  fibers of interstitial tissue, bronchi, and
adventitia of the blood vessels,  catarrhal bronchitis, and emphysema of the
lungs.  The elastic  fibers were severely loosened and, in areas of  emphy-
sema, fragmented.  No changes were noted in the trachea.

     In the kidneys,  there were dystrophic changes in the epithelium of
the convoluted  tubules and wrinkling of the glomeruli.  The liver had small
areas of dystrophy and degeneration with signs of venous congestion.  There
were fine myocardial  extravasations of blood.  The spleen showed a  hyperemia
of the pulp and a marked hemosiderosis.
                                    - 1.23 -

-------

     The  cerebral cortex had focal hyperchromatism of some pyramidal neurons
of layers  II  and V.   Fine foci of gliosis and fallout of cells  of  Ammon's
horn and  their replacement by microglia were observed.  In the  cerebellum,
there was  fallout and wrinkling of the Purkinje cells.

     Golgi staining  showed, among pyramidal neurons of layers III  and V,
certain neurons  having beaded enlargements and swellings with a lack of
spines, but  they were few in number.   Unchanged neurons with even  dendrite
contours  covered with spines were observed more frequently.

     A pathomorphological examination of animals of series IV,  sacrificed
both immediately after exposure and at the end of the recovery  period revealed
large hemorrhagic foci in the lungs and hyperemia of the spleen.

     Microscopic examinations of organs of animals sacrificed both immediately
after exposure and at the end of the  recovery period gave approximately the
same results.

     In the lungs, there was observed a large-focus and interstitial
pneumonia  consisting in a diffuse enlargement of the interalveolar septa
as a result of accumulation of histiocytes, lymphocytes, and a  small number
of polymorphonuclear leucocytes.   The lumina of the alveoli were empty, the
collagenous fibers of the interstitial tissue were swollen, the elastic
tissue was markedly  loosened and consisted of a tangled network with breaks
of the fibers  in areas of emphysema (Fig. 8).  The obliterated  alveoli were
threaded with  elastic and argyrophil  fibers (Fig.  9).  There was venous con-
gestion and catarrhal-desquamative bronchitis.  In the kidneys,  liver and
heart, the changes were similar to those in animals of series III.
                  •KV:

                    '
                                      '*'/.•• •''''"'  ""^i
                           '  '         ('.".•>     •  ,
                   Fig. 8. Lung of white rat No. 60 from series IV.
                   Elastic tissue is loosened and consists of a matted
                   network with rupture of the fibers in areas of
                   emphysema.  Weigert staining. Magnification 40 x 10.
                                    -JL24 -

-------
      Examination  of the cerebral cortex showed hyperchromatism of neurons
of  layers II and  V of the  cortex.  There was focalgliosis, wrinkling  and
serious damage  to neurons  shown by Nissl staining.   The cerebellum showed
wrinkling and fallout of Purkinje cells.   There was focalgliosis in the
medulla oblongata.   Golgi  staining showed some neurons whose  apical dendrites
were  devoid of  spines and  had beaded enlargements  and swellings (Fig.  10).
The main mass of  neurons contained spines on the dendrites.

                    :?$
                    ft

                   Fig. 9.  Lung of rat No. 58 from series IV. Obliterated
                   alveoli are threaded with argyrophil fibers.  Tibor -
                          Papp staining.  Magnification 40 x 10.
                   Fig. 10._ Brain of_rat No. 60 from series IV. Neuron
                   whose apical dendrite has beaded enlargements and swell-
                   ings. No spines are present. Golgi staining.
                                Magnification 40 x 10.
                                      - 125  -

-------
      Studies  of  the  combined  action  of  sulfur oxides.   We studied three
 combinations  of  sulfur  oxides.   In  the  first combination (series V), a
 sulfur  dioxide concentration  of  about 5 mg/m^ was  used (4.79 — 1.51 mg/m3)
 x^ith  a  sulfuric  acid aerosol  concentration  of 1 mg/m^ (0.92 i 0.211 mg/m3) .
 This  combination should have  been helpful in evaluating the nature of the
 combined  resorptive  action  of sulfur oxides.  The  other two combinations
 (series VI  and VII)  made  it possible to substantiate and evaluate the
 existing  maximum permissible  concentrations  (average daily values) of sulfur
 oxide present together.   Therefore,  the nature of  the combined action will
 be evaluated  first on the basis  of materials of series V, and then the
 results of  the study in series VI and VII will be  assessed.

      The  first combination  of sulfur oxides  had no effect on the general
 state and weight of  the experimental animals,  either in absolute indices
 of weight or  as  expressed in  percent.   Data on the ratio of chronaxies of
 antagonist  muscles are  shown  in  Table 7.


                                                   Table 7

               Ratio of Chronaxies  of Antagonist Muscles in Animals of Series V,
Dates of
Background

Exposure






Recovery period

Investigation
G/I1I
1/IV
- 22/IV
1/V
13/V
2 1/V
31/V
7/VI
12/VI
21/IV
29/VI
Ratio of Chronaxies
1,19.1
1,104
1,115
1,11-1
1,108
1,013 (a) •
0,9-lS (a)
O.S65 (c) '
0,870 (c)
0,80-1 (c)
1,110
     The data cited show  that  the  combined  action  of  sulfur dioxide after
one month and 10 days  causes the chronaxies  to become similar,  and then
the ratio of the chronaxies becomes  reversed.  Comparison  of the data cited
with the effect of each individual sulfur oxide  (Fig.  1  and 6)  shows that
the combined action leads  to a greater inversion of the  chronaxies, as shown
by lower values of the ratio and also the presence of an inverse ratio in
the first week of the  recovery period.  This  is  characteristic  of all five
rats-of series V.  A normal ratio  prevailed  during the isolated action of
each oxide during this period.

     To compare the action of  sulfur oxides,  we  calculated the  percent
decrease of the ratio  of  chronaxies  during  the periods of  exposure and the
recovery period for each  oxide from  double  concentrations  and their combina-
tion (Fig. 11).  The ratio of  chronaxies in  the  control  group was taken as
                                    -  126  -

-------
                                        Fig. 11.  Comparative evaluation of the
                                        action of sulfur oxides on the ratio of
                                        chronaxies of antagonist muscles in
                                        percent in enimals of series I, II, III,
                                        IV and V.
                                        1, 4 - sulfur dioxide in concentrations of
                                        4.86 and 8.53 icg/m5 respectively; 2, 5 - sul-
                                        furic acid aerosol in concentrations of 1 and
                                        1.8 mg/m3 respectively; 3 - combination of
                                        sulfur oxides in concentrations of 4.79 ng/m*
                                        of sulfur dioxide and 0.92 mg/ra^ of sulfuric
                                        acid aerosol.
100%.   It  is  evident from a  comparison of these data  that the total decrease
of this  index when each oxide  is  used separately  (9.25 JL 8.8 = 18.05) exceeds
the decrease  in the ratio of chronaxies during inhalation of the mixture  of
the same concentrations (12%)  by  slightly less than a factor of 2.  We  com-
pared  the  change of the ratio  during inhalation of the  combination (series V)
with 1/2 the  sum of the changes in  the ratio of double  concentrations of
sulfur  oxides (series II and IV).   In such a comparison,  one-half the sum of
the percent decrease of the  chronaxies for double concentrations of each
oxide  (2A.25%) is approximately equal to the change in  the ratio of chron-
axies during  the combined action  of sulfur oxide  (12%)  in series V of the
study.   These data show that the  inhalation of a mixture  of sulfur oxides
causes  a change in the ratio of chronaxies corresponding  to a simple summation.

     Results  of the investigation of cholinesterase activity of the blood
of rats  in all five series of  the exposure are shown  in  Fig. 12.

     It  is obvious from the  data  obtained that during inhalation of the
mixture  of sulfur oxides, the  decomposition time of acetylcholine chloride
is shortest,  i.e., the increase in  cholinesterase activity is most pronounced
At the  same time, during the two  weeks of the recovery  period, there was  a
statistically reliable although slight increase in activity.

     Fig.  13  gives comparative data on the increase of  cholinesterase
activity (in  percent of the  initial value) in the period  of exposure and
recovery,  i.e., those periods  during which the changes were observed.  These
data indicate a significant  increase of the effect during inhalation of the
mixture  of sulfur oxides as  compared with the sum of  the  effects during the
                                   -  127  -

-------
                                      Time of observation
                    Fig. 12.  Time of decomposition of acetylcholine chloride
                    during different exposures to the action of sulfur oxides.
                    1 - series I (sulfur dioxide) - 4.86 mg/m3; 2 - series II
                    (sulfur dioxide) - 8.53 mg/rP; 3 - series III (sulfuric
                    acid aerosol - 1.04 mg/np;; 4 - series IV (sulfuric acid
                    aerosol -1.8 mg/m5); 5 - series V (sulfur dioxide -
                    4.79 rag/iiP, sulfuric acid aerosol - 0.92 rag/m'); AB - period
                                     of exposure.


 action  of each  of  them individually (33.3% for  series V versus 15.8% + 6.8%

 =  22.6%).   The  effect  of  increase  of  cholinesterase  activity  in  the first

 case substantially exceeds the effect  for the double  concentrations of each
 oxide and is very  close  to their  sum.
33,3* .)
w
«
                                I/.SS'-
                                             Fig. 13. Comparative evaluation of the
                                             effect of sulfur oxides on the increase
                                             of cholinesterase activity in average
                                             percentages for the period of exposure
                                             and the recovery period.

                                             1, 4 - sulfuric acid aerosol in concen-
                                             trations of 1.04 and 1.8 mg/m3 respectively;
                                             2, 5 - sulfur dioxide in concentrations of
                                             4.86 and 8.53 rag/mf respectively; 3 - combin-
                                             ation of sulfur oxides in concentrations of 4.79
                                             mg/ip5 of sulfur dioxide and 0.92 mg/m? of sul-
                                             furic acid aerosol.
      In a  study  of the  total blood serum protein,  we did  not obtain  any
reliable changes  during the period of exposure to  the combination of  sulfur
oxides.  However,  during the recovery period, the  increase in  the content
of  total protein was statistically significant.  Thus, whereas  during the
period of  background measurements the total  protein content was  7.67  mg %,
during the exposure period it  increased to  7.85 mg %, and during the
recovery period  climbed to 8.10  mg %.
                                        -  128 -

-------
      Comparison of the  results obtained with  data for sulfur dioxide
 (series I) and sulfuric  acid  aerosol (series  III)  in animals of these
 series  did not show any  reliable changes in the  content of total protein
 of  the  blood serum.

      Thus, the combination  of sulfur oxides causes greater changes  in  this
 index than does each oxide  individually.  The protein fractions of  the
 blood serum for animals  of  series V are listed in  Table 8.

                                                    Table 8
                Protein Fractions of the Blood Serum (in percent) During Inhala-
                      tion of fixture of Sulfur Oxides (Series V).
Protein Fraction
Albumins
o - Globulins
P - Globulins
7 - Globulins
Periods of Observations
Background
'10,26
18,1
24.1
17,6
Exposure
35,6 (c)
16,2 (b)
29,0 (c)
19,2 (b)
Recovery
Period
32, 6 (c)
19, T
28,5'(b)
19,7 (a)
     As  can  be seen from Table  8,  a shift takes place  in all the protein
fractions  under the influence of  the mixture of sulfur oxides.   At the same
time,  there  is a decrease in the percentage of albumins  and a globulins
with a sharp increase of 8 and  y globulins.

     An  evaluation of the character of the reaction  to sulfur oxides when
the latter are present together is  shown in Table 9.   Statistically signifi-
cant changes in the various fractions in all the series  are indicated as a
percent  change relative to the  background data.  The plus  sign  marks an
increase of  the content, and the minus sign marks a  decrease.
                                                     Table 9
               Comparative Evaluation of Changes in the Protein Fractions in
                    Percent Under the Influence of Sulfur Oxides.
Series
1
111
Sum
V
11
IV
Sum
• Concentrations
mK/m? •
SO,
4.86
—
4,79
8,53
—
H:SO,
—
1,04
0,92
—
1,8
Albumins
— 11.1
-15,1
-26,2
-11,6
— 6,2
— 16,6
—22,8
Globulins
a
0
0
0
— 10,5
— 18,3
0
— 18,3
q '
-i-13,6
-i-13,2
+ 26, S
H-19,8
-MS, 6
-i-20,7
-'•39,o
v
1
-i-11.3
0
-•-11,3
-1-9.1
0
0
0
                                    - 129 -

-------
     From Table 9 it may be concluded that each concentration of sulfur
dioxide causes a particular reaction:  a low concentration (4.86 mg/m3)
decreases the percent content of albumins during the period of exposure
and increases it for 6 globulins; a double concentration causes a smaller
decrease of the percent content of albumins, but decreases it for a glob-
ulins as well, without changing the percentage content of y globulins.  A
change in the latter in the presence of a double concentration of sulfur
dioxide is manifested only during the recovery period.  Sulfuric acid
aerosol causes more regular shifts in the protein fractions, decreasing
the percent content of albumins and increasing the content of 6 globulins
when it is present in both lower and higher concentration.

     In a comparative evaluation of the combined action of sulfur oxides,
attention is drawn to the great similarity of the response reaction with
double concentrations of each oxide.  Thus, one-half the sum of double
concentrations for each oxide is nearly equal in effect to the combination
of their half-concentrations.  This is particularly apparent in the case
of a and (3 globulins:  for the combination during the period of exposure,
there was a 10.5% decrease in a globulins versus !"• 3^ = 9.15% for double
                                                   2
concentrations.  The same is observed in the ratio of 6 globulins:  19.8%
versus 19.6% respectively.  A good agreement is given by this calculation
for albumins and $ globulins during the recovery period.  This analysis of
the material on the protein fractions leads to the conclusion that there is
a simple summation of the effects during inhalation of a mixture of sulfur
oxides.   It would be difficult to expect a higher degree of agreement be-
tween the results when the experimentation is performed on a living organism.

     Results of the determination of coproporphyrins in the urine of animals
of series V are shown in Fig. 14.  An increase in the amount of copropor-
phyrins  in the urine was already observed seven days after the start of
exposure.   No such rapid reaction was noted in animals of series I (sulfur
dioxide  - 4.86 mg/m3) and series III (sulfuric acid aerosol - 1 mg/m3).
When each oxide was used separately, the first reaction was manifested
1 1/2 months after the start of exposure in animals of series I and one
month and eight days in animals of series III.  In series with double con-
centrations of sulfur oxides, a reaction was already observed one week after
the start of exposure in animals of series IV (sulfuric acid aerosol) -
1.8 mg/m3).

    .After comparing the data on coproporphyrins in all 5 series, x^e came
to the conclusion that their excretion in the urine during the action of
the mixture of sulfur oxides is approximately the same as for isolated
action,  but the first reaction appears earlier.

     Focal pneumonia and hyperemia of the spleen were established by
pathologico-anatomical autopsy of animals of series V both after the exposure
and at the end of the recovery period.
                                   - 130 -

-------
                               Time of observation
             Fig. 14.  Content of coproporphyrins in the urine of animals
             of series V.
             1 - control group; 2 - combination of sulfur oxides; AB - period
             of exposure.
     Microscopic examination of organs of  the animals, sacrificed immediately
after exposure and at the  end of the recovery period, revealed approximately
identical  changes.  Large-focus and diffuse  interstitial  pneumonia was  dis-
covered  in the lungs.  There was catarrhal-desquamative bronchitis and
catarrhal-purulent tracheitis with hyperplasia of the mucosa of the trachea
(Fig. 15).   There were peribronchial and perivascular edema and sclerosis,
and an irregular thickening of the vessel  wall.   The elastic framework  was
diffuse, and the fibers were frequently broken (Figs. 16,  17).  The pneumonic
segments were threaded with a tightly woven  elastic network.   The histiocytes
in the lungs of rats of this series had short, teratic processes, larded with
tiny lumps and coarse grains of pigment  (Fig.  18).
                                                            I
                    Fig. 15. Trachea of rat No. 68 from series V.  Catarrhal-
                    purulent tracheitis with hyperplasia of the mucosa.  Stain-
                    ing with hematoxylin-eosin.  Magnification 10 x 10.
                                     - 131 -

-------

                 iT'SSs.^y-.   i    -"^V^ |w';:^wv-
                  v  -••        "••• .              • •-:  ;,.
                                       tig-a
                 PI     Vlll           »
                 Fig. 16. Lung of rat No. 66 from series V. Diffuse
                 elastic framework, frequently broken and ceiled fibers.
                 Weigert staining.  Magnification 40 x 10. '
     Examination of the  cerebral  cortex revealed areas of wrinkling and
hyperchromatism of pyramidal neurons  of layers  II and V of the cortex.
There was fallout of  cells  of Ammon's horn and  their replacement with
microglia.  There were perivascular cuffs, consisting of round cells, edema
in the lower parts of the brain,  hyperchromatism in the cerebellum, and
angularity of Purkinje cells  (Fig.  19).   In the medulla oblongata, the con-
tours of large neurons were smooth.   There was  gliosis and neuron ophagi a.

     In Golgi staining,  among normal  neurons  with well-defined spines on
their dendrites, there are  fairly frequent neurons whose apical dendrites
are devoid of spines  and have beaded  enlargements and swellings (Fig. 20) .
Such changes disappear toward the end of the  recovery period.

     Two other combinations of sulfur oxides  (series VI and VII) were
studied in order to check the existing maximum  permissible (average daily)
concentrations of sulfur oxides when  present  together.  These  two series of
studies were carried  out in different periods.   The actual concentrations
were (M ± a) , in series  VI:  sulfur dioxide 0.182 - 0.067 mg/m3, and sulfuric
acid aerosol 0.104 —  0.042 mg/m^.   In series  VII, the concentrations were:
sulfur dioxide 0.101 ± 0.25 mg/m3,  and sulfuric acid aerosol 0.099 ± 0.008
    -* (versus the given  concentrations of 0.1 mg/m^ for each oxide).
     We did not observe  any influence  of the  combinations studied on the
behavior and weight of the animals.  The weight  gain of the animals was the
same in both the experimental  and  control groups.
                                  - 132 -

-------
     Results of the study of  the  ratio of chronaxies  of antagonist muscles
for  animals  of series VI are  given  in Fig. 21.  A normal ratio of chronaxies
in animals  of series VI was preserved during the first  month and half of
exposure.   However, at the end  of the second month of exposure, a converg-
ence began which proved to be statistically reliable  on 7/VI.  The week after
the  completion of exposure, the ratio of chronaxies reached the background
values.  Thus, the combined action  of sulfur oxides in  concentrations close
to the maximum average daily  values for each oxide manifests itself after
two  months  of continuous round-the-clock exposure, causing a convergence of
the  chronaxies.  Despite the  fact that statistically  significant changes
were obtained during only one period of observation,  we are forced to
acknowledge  this combination  as being active on the central nervous system.
The  conclusion drawn from group data is supported by  analysis of material
on the individual rats of this  series.
 teSvt^*

  Fig. 17.  Lung of rat No. 71 from series V.
  Ruptures of argyrophil fibers.  Tibor-Papp stain-
  ing.  Magnification 40 x 10.
                                             "  ;•'•>•
                                               •.:. '
                                             Fig. 18.  Lung of rat No. 64 from series V.  Histio-
                                             oytes with short teratic processes filled with small
                                             lumps and coarse grains of pigment.  Beletskiy stain-
                                             ing.  Magnification 20 x 10.
                                     - 133 -

-------
Vjp; - *•;•"— --J-            ^^~r--n ••--•»••"-

                1,       '       ':; •:,   •   '.."&.
  <&'•>'&'&*.
                                            %   $$
                                            .fe:   v
                     i
Fig. 19.  Cerebellum of rat No. 74 from series V.
Fallout, hyperchromatism and angularity of Purkinje
cells.  Staining with hexatoxylin-eosin.  Magnifica-
tion 40 x 10.
                                V
Fig. 20.  Cerebral cortex of rat No.  6l  from series V.
Neuron whose apical dendrites are devoid of spines and
have beaded enlargements and swellings.  Golgi staining.
Magnification 40 x 10.
                        - 134  ~

-------
              o
              o
              -p
                                    Time of observation
                 Fig. 21. Ratio of chronaxies of antagonist muscles in animals
                 of series VI.
                 AB - period of exposure; 1 - control group; 2 - series VI;
                 c - confidence factor of the change, 99.9$.
      In animals of  series  VII,  the normal ratio of chronaxies was preserved
 during the entire course of  the observation.   There was not a single  case
 of convergence or crossing of  the chronaxies  in the individual animals,
 despite the fact that  the  exposure was extended to 75 days.

      Results of determination  of cholinesterase activity in animals of
 series VI showed that  the  second combination  of sulfur oxides causes  a
 statistically reliable  decrease in the decomposition time of acetylcholine
 chloride, i.e., an  increase  in  cholinesterase activity.  This increase in
 cholinesterase activity also manifests itself only at the end of the  second
 month of exposure.  Analysis of the material  for individual rats shows a
 decrease in decomposition  time  to 30 minutes  (or 40 minutes in background
 measurements) .

      No changes in  cholinesterase activity  in animals of series VII were
 observed, either in average  indices or in the analysis of the material for
 the individual animals.

      No statistically reliable  changes in the content of total protein were
 observed in animals of series VI or VII.
      Results of the study of  the  ratio  of  protein fractions of the blood
 serum in animals of series VI are presented  in  Table 10.   Data for the
 period of exposure are divided into  two groups:   the first includes materials
 for 4 and 22/V, i.e. , the first 1 1/2 months of exposure, and the second for
 6/VI; i.e., the end of the second month of exposure.

      From Table 10 it is evident  that reliable  changes in the ratio of pro-
 tein fractions were observed  only at the end of the  second month in a
 single fraction, the 3 globulins.  The  percent  content of albumins also
 decreased, but not in all the rats,  so  that  the average value of the differ-
^ence proved to be statistically insignificant.   During the recovery period,

-------
 the decrease of  the percent  content of  albumins was  reliable, without
 appreciable deviations in  any of  the globulin  fractions.

                                                Table 10

             Protein Fractions of Blood Serum in Percent in Animals of Series VI.
Protein Fractions

a -
P-
7 -
Albumins
Globulins
Globulins
.Globulins
Back-
ground

-10,26
18,1
24,1
17,6
Exposure

4 and
22/V
39,7
17,9
2-!, 9
17,5

6/VI
35,0
18,7
29,4 (c)
16,9
Recovery
Period

• 35,0 (a)
1S.S
24,7
21.4
     The combined action of sulfur oxides in  concentrations  of  0.1  mg/m^
each did not cause any  changes in the  ratio of  the  protein fractions
(Table 11).

     The last index which we used for  the evaluation  of  the  effects of the
investigated concentrations of sulfur  oxides  was  the  content of copropor-
phyrins in the urine of the experimental animals.   The sulfur oxides  in
combinations of series  VI and VII did  not influence the  excretion of  copro-
porphyrins.  Nor were any changes observed in the histopathological examin-
ination of the internal organs and brain of animals of these series.

     Summing up the results of the study with the last two combinations of
sulfur oxides (series VI and VII), one can conclude that the inhalation of
a mixture of sulfur oxides in concentrations  close  to the average daily
maximum permissible ones for atmospheric air  is not without  effect  under
conditions of prolonged continuous action.  This  is demonstrated by a de-
crease in the subordinational influence of the  central nervous  system,
manifested by a convergence of the chronaxies of  the  antagonist muscles,
and also by an increase in cholinesterase activity  and a change in  the
protein fractions of the blood serum,  chiefly as  a  result of an increase in
the percent content of  8 globulins.  All these  disturbances  occurred  at the
end of the second month of exposure.   The above suggests that the combined
presence of sulfur dioxide and sulfuric acid  aerosol  in  the  atmospheric air
of populated areas is not permissible  in concentrations  at the  level  of the
existing maximum permissible average daily concentrations for each  oxide.
At the same time, the combined presence of sulfur dioxide and sulfuric acid
aerosol in concentrations of 0.1 mg/m^ each,  when the period of exposure is
extended to 75 days, turns out to have no effect  on the  animals.  If  this
concentration is expressed in fractions of the maximum permissible  average
daily values for each oxide, the sum is 1.66  (0.1:0.15 + 0.1:0.1).
                                    - 136 -

-------
                                                     Table 11

               Protein Fractions of the Blood Serum in Percent in Animals of Series VII.
Group of
Animals •
Control
Series VII. .
Background
Albu-
mins
41,5
41,0
Globulins
a
19,9
19,2
?
2-1,1
2-1,9
. T '
14,5
14,9
Exposure
Albu-
mins
39,4
40,2
Globulins'
a
19,0
17,7
P
26,0
25,8
7
15,3
16,2
     The results of  the  last  series  of the experiment on the combined action
of sulfur oxides indicate  that  the joint presence of sulfur dioxide and
sulfuric acid serosol  in  the  atmospheric air of populated areas (average
daily concentrations)  may  be  evaluated by using a formula derived from the
principle of simple  summation:
                                  m
where a is the observed sulfur  dioxide  concentration;  m is its maximum per-
missible  (average daily)  concentration;  b  is  the observed concentration of
sulfuric  acid aerosol, and n  is  the  maximum permissible average daily con-
centration.
                                 Conclusions

     On the basis of the  above,  it  may  be  concluded that a long-term
continuous inhalation of  a mixture  of sulfur oxides enhances the effect of
the influence of each individual oxide  according to additive synergism.
Therefore, the joint presence  of sulfur dioxide  and sulfuric acid aerosol
in the atmospheric of populated  areas  (average daily concentrations) should
be estimated by using a formula  derived from the principle of simple
summation.
                                    -..137 -

-------
                       LITERATURE  CITED
 B o p n cc ii K o 13 a P.  B.  Tiir.  n can.,  1954, Al>  1, crp. 2-1—29.
 byiuTycnn K. A. Fur. n can., 1956, jY° 2,  crp.  17—22.
 B y m T y c u a  K.  A. 3KciiepiiMCi!Ta.'ibiii.jc Aaiim.ic o  B.innnnn  Ma.iux
   KoiiucnTpniiiiri OXIIC.IOB ccpu iia  opramnM WHUOTIIUX.  B cC.:  I'lpc-
   AC.Hbiio AOiiycTii.Muc KOimcHTpaniin  aTMOCc|)cpnu.\  3.irp 1,
   cip. 35—37.
 C o .n o M ii n  I'. M.  riiniciiii'iccxasi OUCIIKH Aiiim.ia  Ka:c  sarpnainiTC.nfi
   ar.Moccjicpiioro iios.iyxa.  B  cG.:  FlpeAC/ii'iio AoiiycriiMUC  Koiiuciirpa-
   HUM imioc(|)cpin>ix 3arpn3iiciu:ii. 1962,  c. 6,  M6—164.

 TKa'icn n.  T. Fur u can.,  1963, A» 4, crp. 3—11.
 V 0  a  ii A y .n n a e n  P.  Sarpsmiciiiic  ar.MocmepHoro  sosAyxa  (Jn'ptbypj-
   AO.M n cro  riinicini'jccKcTj! onciiKa.    B  co.:  npCAC.ni>!io  AOiiycTiiMi,:c
   KoiinciiTpauiii: aT.voc(!)ep!».!x 3arp«3nciinii.  1961,  7,  crp. 11—31.
  C.M L A M a i! 1O.  P. AUCTOII  K.TK aT.\iocc[)Cp;ioe sarpcsiieiine.  B   co.:
   ripcAC.Tbiio  Aonyciii.Mi.ie KOHncin-pauini  aiMocipepMux   sarpjuiiciiiii!.
   1962, n. 6, crp.  109—127.
 ll >K a o  M >K e n • mi.  fur. n  can., 1959, B. 10,  ci-p.  7—12.
 M n  >i< n K o n  B. A.  MaTCpiia.ibi  K  oCociioiiaiiiiio npc,T.e.TL>!io   AOiiycin-
   Mbix KoiinciiTpamn'i io.nyii.nciiAii>i3ou>iai!aTa B  arMoccjicpiiOM B03Ayxe.
   Tnr. 11  can., 1963,  .Nj 6, crp.  8--15.                  •  . •
 T r c o n  J., D u t r a F., C a p p e 1  J.,   S  i g u o n M.,   J o u n k e r  \V.
  • Arch.'Induslr. hyg.,  1950,  N  2, p. 716—734
 Amdtir M.  Pub!. Hlth. rep..  1953.  May.  p. 474.
                                 -  138  -

-------
              BIOLOGICAL ACTION OF LOW MANGANESE  CONCENTRATIONS

                         DURING INHALATIONAL  EXPOSURE
                            Candidates of Medical Sciences
                    F.  V.  Dokuchayeva and N. N.  Skvortsova
                   A. N. Sysin Institute of General and Communal Hygiene,
                           Academy of Medical Sciences, USSR

From  "Biologicheskoe deystvie i gigienicheskoe  znachenie atmosfernykh
zagryazneniy".   Pod  redaktsiey Prof. V. A. Ryazanova i Prof. M. S. Gol'dberga.
Izdatel'stvo  "Meditsina" Moskva, p.  173-184,  (1966).

      The preceding paper* reported on  the contamination of atmospheric  air
with  industrial discharges of manganese and their influence on the health
of the population, and also on the intratracheal administration to white
rats  of low doses  of manganese approximately  corresponding to the maximum
permissible value  for  plant buildings.

      The present paper discusses the results  of chronic inhalational
exposure of white  rats to low manganese concentrations.

      The experimental  validation of maximum permissible concentrations  of
dust  materials  involves certain difficulties because  of the lack of the
means for providing  stable and low concentrations in  the exposure chambers.
In addition,  the dust  frequently has neither  an odor  nor an irritating  effect.
For this reason, the establishment of its maximum permissible content is
possibly only on the basis of a general toxic effect  during an extended
inhalational  exposure.

      We used  a  dust  chamber with a volume of ^0.8 m3,  patterned after  a
model chamber built  by the Kiev Institute of Labor Hygiene and Professional
Diseases.  A modification of the Erman dust generator made it possible  to
produce in the  chamber a manganese dust concentration of 0.3 and 0.03 mg/m  ,
i.e., 275 and 2750 times  lower than in the author's  experiments.

      The experiments were conducted on white rats of  pure Wistar strain in
two series:   in the  first (nine males and 16 females)  with the 0.3 mg/m^
concentration  (maximum permissible value for plant buildings) and in the
second (12 males and 16 females) with the 0.03  mg/m-*  concentration (highest
single maximum  permissible value for atmospheric air).   Each series had its
own group of  control rats.  Because of the presence  of only one exposure
 *V. F. Dokuchayeva and N. N. Skvortsova. Contamination of atmospheric air with manganese compounds
  and their influence on the organism. In:  Maximum permissible concentrations of atmospheric con-
  taminants. Prof. V. A. Ryazanov, ed., 1962, Vol. VI.
                                    - 139 -

-------
 chamber  (characterized by a large bulk), the exposure of the two series  of
 animals  x^as  carried out in sequence (Table.l).
                                                     Table 1
                             Summary Table of Experiments
Experiment
Series and
• Date of •
Exposure
I
15/VII 1960 r.—
20/1 I9G1 r.
11
27/IH-l/XI
196! r.
III.
8/IX 19G1 r. —
7/1 1 1962 r.
No. of rats
Males


/ 9


12


8
Fe-
males


16


16


—
".inOo concen-
tration,
mg/m3,
M ± m


0,302 + 0,054


0,033 + 0,002


4,12 + 0,181
Control
No. of rats
Hales


9


15


6
Fe-
males


16


15


—
In the course
of the exper-
iment, total
no. of animals
sacrificed


13


8


1
     The  tests employed  included a dynamic observation of the weight  of
the animals,  a study  of  the  red blood, histopathological examination  of
the lungs, and certain biochemical tests (porphyrin metabolism, cholin-
esterase  activity  of  the blood, the ratio-of blood serum protein fractions,
and ascorbic  acid  content of the liver and adrenal glands).

     To check the  adequacy of the biochemical tests chosen, another series
of experiments (III)  was carried out which included eight experimental and
six control male rats -  a positive control group exposed in an adapted
gas chamber to higher manganese concentrations, on the order of 3-6 mg/m^
(average  concentration 4.12  mg/m3), i.e., 100 to 200 times higher than the
maximum permissible value for atmospheric air.

     Manganese dioxide powder (95% Mn02) predried at 100°C. and ground,
containing an average of 82% of particles measuring less than 5 y, was
used for  the exposure of animals.

     The manganese concentrations  in the chambers were checked by taking
samples every hour (the  collection of each sample lasted one hour).

     The manganese content was  determined by using a method modified by
the air hygiene section  of the  A.  N.  Sysin Institute of General and Communal
Hygiene, Academy of Medical  Sciences, USSR.*
    "•Instructions for the Organization of the Study of Atmospheric Pollution.  Uedgiz, 1963, p. 123.
                                   - 140. -

-------
      The exposure was carried out for 5-6  hours  daily on working days  only.
 The total duration of the exposure for series  I  (0.3 mg/m3)  was  six months,
 for series II (0.03 mg/m3) seven months,  and for series  III  (3-6 mg/m3)
 five months.

      The analyses showed that samples with concentrations of 0.15 to 0.45
 mg/m3 of series  I comprised 89.4%, with more than half of the total number
 of samples (53.5%) consisting of Mn02 concentrations in  the  range of 0.25-
 0.35 mg/m3.  Samples with higher concentrations  were generally observed
 only in the course of 61 hours out of 872, i.e., in 7% of the cases.  The
 average of all 872 samples was 0.302 Jl 0.054 mg/m3 Mn02-

      The scatter of the concentrations in  magnitude for  the  seven months of
 exposure of series II animals was approximately  the same.  The largest number
 of hourly samples (915, or 89.1%) ranged  from 0.015 to 0.045 mg/m3.  The
 average hourly concentration of MnC>2 in these  groups of  concentrations was
 0.027 mg/m3,  and the average of all 1027 samples was 0.033 ± 0.002 mg/m3.
 Manganese concentrations in the 100-liter  gas  chamber also corresponded  to
 the specified conditions of the experiment,  the  average  of all 545 samples
 being 4.12 ± 0.181 mg/m3.

      As we know, two Mn02 concentrations - the highest single value
 (0.03 mg/m3)  and the average daily value  (0.01 mg/m3)  -  have been confirmed
 as tentative  maximum permissible values for  atmospheric  air.   These concen-
.trations were established by calculations  on the basis.of the maximum  per-
 missible concentration of manganese for the  air  of plant  buildings,  a  value
 also determined  without experimental verification.

      It was not  possible to establish the  highest maximum permissible  con-
 centration of manganese experimentally, since  manganese  compounds have no
 odor and no irritating effect.   Cases of acute poisoning with manganese
 under industrial conditions are not known  either.   However,  even very  slight
 amounts of manganese, as will be shown below,  are capable of causing certain
 reactions in  the organism.  In intensity of  toxic action,  manganese may be
 classified with  a certain approximation among  such industrial poisons  as
 lead and mercury (A.  F.  Makarchenko).

      For this reason, the noxiousness of manganese concentrations which may
 be present in atmospheric air should be evaluated only on the basis of their
 general toxic effects, checked by experiments  on animals,  and the value of
 the maximum permissible concentration of manganese should be determined in
 the form of a daily average, as was recommended  by V.  A.  Ryazanov for  sub-
 stances having a general toxic effect.

      We did not  have the technical facilities  available  for  round-the-clock
 exposure, and therefore conducted the exposure for 5-6 hours a day.  How-
 ever,  since our  experiments were chronic in  character, they  can  be used as
                                     - 141 -

-------
material  for substantiating  the  average  daily maximum permissible  concen-
tration.

     Occupational  pathology  data indicate  a high  toxicity  of  manganese
compounds, which are  capable  of  accumulating in  the  organism  and causing
ill effects.   The  toxic  influence of manganese does  not  manifest itself
immediately, but only  as  a result of more  or less lasting  contact  with
it  (V.  S. Surat, A. P. Sapozhnikov and A.  P. Shilova, 1936; E.  A.  Drogichina,
1948;  G.  N. Cherepanova,  1946; V.  A. Mikhaylov and F. S. Trop,  1953;  Couper,
1937,  and others).

     The  most  frequent manifestations of manganese intoxication under
industrial conditions  are lesions of the striopallidal system of the  brain
and lesions of the  respiratory organs  (pneumonia, pneumonoconioses,  chronic
bronchitis, laryngitis,  etc.)  (Z.  I. Bakradze, 1923;  Buttner, Lenz,  1937;
M. E.  Machabeli, 1957, and others).

     In a medical  survey of  children in  the vicinity  of  industrial discharges
we also observed a  high  disease  rate, particularly pneumonias and  diseases
of the upper respiratory tract,  i.e., the  demonstrated shifts in the  state
of health of the child population are similar to  the  changes  developing in
workers under  industrial conditions.

     For  this  reason,  the chief  criterion  in series  I of the  animals  was
the histopathological examination of the lungs.*   The results of the  exam-
ination after six months of exposure showed that  the  histopathological
changes in the lungs of males of series  I  could not  be evaluated as being
the consequence of  exposure,  since  some  changes were  frequently observed
in the majority of  the control animals.

     In contrast, examinations of the female rats showed an adverse effect
of manganese in 0.3 mg/m^ concentration  on the respiratory tract.   A  con-
sequence  of this effect was  chiefly the  appearance of inflammatory changes
in the pulmonary tissue  and also the appearance of circulatory  disorders
in the vascular system of the lungs and  the development  of moderate symptoms
of peribronchial and perivascular sclerosis of the pulmonary  tissue.   Changes
of this kind were noted  in the experimental group in  all 15 female rats,
whereas they occurred in only four  out of  13 control  rats.

     The  statistically reliable  difference between the number of lesions
of the lungs in female rats in the  experimental and  control groups sug-
gests  that the manganese concentration of  the order  of the maximum per-
missible  value for  plant buildings  is active on the  organism  of female rats
during chronic inhalational exposure.
    The histopathological examination was made by Candidate of Medical Sciences Yu. N. Solov'yev.
                                   - 142 -

-------
      No changes  of any kind  were observed in the weight (the rats  were
x^eighed twice  a  month) and in the state  of red blood  (the number  of
erythrocytes and the hemoglobin were determined at  the start,  in  the middle
and  at the end of exposure).
                fcc O
                f. 60

                §"8!
                O. .-< •
                O
                «
                D.  :
                O
                O
1.?
'
i,o\ • .
«/
B.i-
n L
0.2
^\,
.

^/ \
/ A V>
/ — / \
"*•*"""
               S 6  7 S  S 10 II 12  13 n

               Number of determinations
Excretion of coproporphyrin \vith urine during inhalational
           exposure of rats to manganese.
1 - concentration, 4.12 ng/m3; 2 - control; AB - period of
exposure.
      According to  the data  of  biochemical  investigations, exposure  to the
4.12  mg/m3 concentration of MnC>2 (series III)  increased the cholinesterase
activity of the blood and caused the effect  of porphyrinuria in  the experi-
mental animals (Table 2 and Figure).

      In series II  of experiments,  no changes were observed in the porphyrin
metabolism.  The same applies  to the determination of  ascorbic acid in the
liver and adrenals  (using the  method of  the  Vitaminology Institute) ,  in the
content of which no shifts were  observed,  in contrast  to the data of  Rudra
(1944), N. V. Tatarinova (1951), and A. M.  Birenbaum  (1957), who observed
such  shifts when manganese was administered  with food.

                                                        Table 2

                  Activity of Blood  Cholinesterase in Rats Exposed to the 4.12 mg/m'1
                      	Concentration of unOg {series .III), Minute_s_.	
-
Wales
rimental
rol
Date of Determination
25/Vll 19CI r.
30
30'
G.'IX
35
35
9,'X
35
35
17/XI
30
30
30/1 1052 r.
17
22
G.'ll
21
27
     In  a study of  the composition of protein fractions  of the blood*
    ••The determination of the protein fractions was carried out by Doctor of Medical Sciences A.  A. Tyurina
and Candidate of Medical Sciences L. I. Kulikova.
                                      -  143

-------
 in experimental  female  rats  of  series  II,  changes  were observed in the ratio
 of the  content of  protein  fractions, i.e.,  an  increase in the amount of
 globulins  and a  decrease in  the amount of  albumins.   In the males, such
 changes were not detected  even  when  concentrations such as 4.12 mg/rn-^ of
 MnC>2 were  employed (Table  3).

     At the end  of the  experiment, a histopathological examination of the
 pulmonary  tissue was  also  performed  on animals of  series II.   Preparations
 of the  lungs were  stained  with  hematoxylin-eosin and hematoxylin picrofuchsin
 according  to Van Gieson*and  argyrophil fibers  were developed by Bielschowsky's**
 method.  In addition, the  preparations were stained with toluidine blue, and
 the reaction was carried out according to  Hotchkiss (the MacManus reaction).

     The examination  of the  experimental group of  males of series II in two
 out of  12  animals  showed definite inflammatory phenomena in the lungs
 (purulent  bronchitis, chronic abscessing bronchopneumonia).  No signs of
 gross pathology  were  observed in the remaining animals of this group.  How-
 ever, accumulations of  macrophages containing  lumps of brown dust pigment
 were found in the  peribronchial lymphoid tissue and under the pleura in the
 majority of animals of  this  group.   In some cases, vague signs of desquamation
 of the  alveoli and bronchial epithelium were observed along with manifesta-
 tions of a certain increase  in  the number  of collagenous fibers in the
 peribronchial zones and in the  stroma  of lymphatic nodes of the hilum of the
 lung.

     In the experimental group  of females,  gross inflammatory changes of the
 lungs were observed in  six rats out  of 14.   The remaining changes were
 analogous  to those found in  the male rats  of this  group.   In almost all the
 cases, minor accumulations of dust macrophages were also observed without
 any sings  of reaction among  the surrounding tissue components.

     Among the 14  male  rats  of  the control  group,  inflammatory changes were
noted in four cases, but they were less definite than in the experimental
 group.  In the control  group of females, inflammation signs in the respira-
 tory organs were observed  in only two  rats  out of  13.

     In Hotchkiss  staining and  staining with toluidine blue,  as well as in
 the development  of argyophil fibers  according  to Bielschowsky,  no fundamental
 structural changes were detected in  the lungs  of either the experimental or
 the control animals.

     Comparing these materials  of the  histological examination with similar
 data obtained from the  exposure of animals  of  series I (0.3 mg/m^), one can
note that  in the groups of males being compared, the number of  animals with
 inflammatory phenomena  in  the lungs  in the  experimental and control groups
was approximately  the same (Table 4),  and  in any case does not  permit one to
 consider any kind  of relationship between  the  appearance of inflammatory

 **  [Translator's note:  Van Gizon, Bilishov, Khochkis, according to the transliteration of Russian reference. ]
                                    - 144 -

-------
                                                                                                                     Table  3
                                 Protein Composition of Blood Serum (in percentages) in Animals of Series II  and  III  During  Exposure

                                                                         to Manganese Dioxide.
 I

h-"
JS



 I
Mn02
Concen-
tration,
mg/m5
0.033
(Series II)



4.12
(Series III)
Group of
Animals
Experimental
Females
Control Females
Expf-imental
Males
Control Males
Experimental
Kales
Control Males
Total
Protein
8,53
8,34
7,49
G.8G
. 8,46
8,52
Globulins
'(
12,70
12, 44
13,98
14,24
15,20
14,12
P
20,86
19,39
25' 08
25,74
19,42.
21,15
a
11,86
10,39
13,07
11,52
15,03
13,84
Total Amount
of
Globulins
45,49
42,57
52,56
51,91
49,66
49,11
Total
Amount of
Albumins
54,24
57,46
47,84
48,15
50,59
50,98
Albumin-
Globulin
Ratio
1,19
1,35
O',91
0,93
1,02
1.04

-------
processes in the experimental males and the penetration of manganese into
the respiratory tract.
                                                       Table 4
                       Number of Animals with Changes in the Lungs.
Series
1
II .-
Ill
I'r.Og
Concen-
tration,
mg/m?
0 302
0 033
4 12 .
Males'
Experimental Control
4 out of 8
2 out of 12
5 out of 8
7 out of 9
4 out of 14
J> out of 6
Females
Experimental
15 out of 15
6 out of 14
—
Control-
4 out of IJ,
2 out of 13
—
     In experimental females of series II, inflammatory changes were observed
in six rats out of 14 (somewhat more frequently than in the control) , but this
difference proved to be statistically unreliable, and therefore a manganese
concentration of 0.03 mg/m3 cannot be considered to be active on the respira-
tory organs of female rats.

     However, during inhalational exposure to the 0.03 mg/m^ manganese  con-
centration   for seven months, the pulmonary tissue of the animals, indepen-
dently of the sex, showed a deposition of particles of manganese dioxide
aerosol, which was absorbed more slowly than other oxide compounds of mangan-
ese, but was also excreted more slowly (E. N. Levina, 1962).  This fact is
alarming if one takes into account the cumulative properties of manganese.
It is possible that during a longer exposure, even such low manganese concen-
trations may prove to be active on the pulmonary tissue when the lability of
the organism is greater.

     Moreover, inhalational exposure of animals of both sexes to 0.3 and
0.03 mg/m3 concentrations also shoxved that the organism of female rats  is
more sensitive to the action of low doses of manganese than that of male
rats.  The high sensitivity of females to manganese has also been observed
in intratracheal administration.
     A study of the red blood in series II of the experiment  (0-03
did not reveal any changes in the hemoglobin content or in  the number  of
erythrocytes , either in the males or in the females.  In series  III  (4.12
mg/m3) did not reveal any changes in the hemoglobin content or in the  number
of erythrocytes, either in the males or in the females.  In series III
(4.12 mg/m^) , toward the end of the fifth month of exposure,  a statistically
reliable decrease in the number of erythrocytes was observed  in  the  experi-
mental rats  as compared with the controls.  Toward the end  of exposure, the
amount of erythrocytes in the experimental group increased  to 106.5% of the
initial value, and in the control, to  113.4%.  The difference in the hemoglobin
                                   -.146 -

-------
content and magnitude of the color index was not significant.

     Dynamic observation of the weight of the animals showed that in series
III there was no substantial difference in the weight of the experimental
and control animals, exposed to the 0.03 mg/m3 manganese concentration as in
the group of females of series II.  In the group of males (0.03 mg/rn-^) , for
the same average weight at the start of the experiment, the curve of the
average weight of experimental males starting from the end of the first month
of exposure runs all the way to the end of the experiment above the curve of
the control animals.  At the same time, the difference in the average weight
in the fifth month and at the end of the exposure becomes statistically
reliable.
                                Conclusions

     1.  The inhalational exposure of white rats to an average concentration
of 0.302 mg/nH of MnO? for 5-6 hours a day for six months causes changes in
the lungs of female rats manifested in inflammatory phenomena in the pulmon-
ary tissue, the onset of circulatory disorders in the vascular system of the
lungs, and the development of moderate symptoms of peribronchial and peri-
vascular sclerosis of the pulmonary tissue.

     2.  An average concentration of 0.033 mg/nH of Mn02 during inhalational
exposure for 5-6 hours a day for seven months proves to be active on the
composition of the protein fractions of the blood serum in female rats,
causing a change in the ratio of the content of albumins and globulins.

     At the same concentration, the lungs of animals of both sexes show
dust particles of manganese dioxide, and in male rats there is observed a
tendency toward a gradual and more rapid weight increase as compared with
the control animals.

     3.  In the inhalation exposure of male rats to an average concentration
of 4.12 mg/m^ of MnC>2 in the course of five months (group of positive con-
trol), the phenomena of prophyrinuria, increase of cholinesterase activity
of the blood and decrease of the number of erythrocytes at the end of the
exposure were observed.

     4.  Our data suggest that the reaction of white rats to the action of
manganese may be different depending on the sex of the animals.  For this
reason, the experiments should be conducted on animals of both sexes, since
the reactivity of the females to the action of toxic substances may be greater
than that of males.

     5.  A further experimental study of even lower doses of manganese
administered in round-the-clock inhalational exposure is necessary.
                                      147

-------
                     LITERATURE  CITED

BaKpa,i3e 3. II. Tiiniciia Tpyaa, 1923, ,V° 10—11,  40.
B i! p e 11 6 a y M  A. M. Vsp. CMOXIIM. JKyp.n.,  1957, XXIX, .Y° 1, crp. 113.
JloKyMaena  B. .,  CxnopuoBa  H. H. Sarpr.aiieiMie  ar.Moc^ep-
  noro  DODjiyxa  coeaniiSiiiisiMii Mapraiuia  n MX  B.inninie  na opra:i:i3M.
  B  CO.:  ripCAC.TbilO  .lOHVCTH.MUe  KOIUlCIITpailliil aTMOCt^CpHUX  33rpr3-
  iicinifi.  M..  19G2. u.  6, c'rp. 62.
JH. p o r ;i M ii u a 3. A. OT.ia.icinmc noc.ne.iCTmsfi  n icp.'niih np» IIMTO;;-
  cni;a!u:n MapraimcM.  B cu.:  Bonpocu ninicm,:  rpy.ir.  n npcvJ)L>cc;:o-
  li.i.-ibiiux 3cj\ n  M. 3.  Tnr.  n can.,  1957, .V? 'i,  crp. 29.
  PK 3 a n on  B. A. OCIIOUIIHC iipinmiinb! ruriiCMii'iccKoro iiopMiiponamin
    aTMOc(j)C[);ii>ix aarpsisiiciiin'i. B  cG.:  ripc.'ic.'ibiio AOiiycniMuc  KOI;HCMT-
    paunii atMOCcjicpiiui.x 3arp»3MciiiiM. M.,_i952, D. 1, crp. 9.
  C y p a T  B.  C., C a n o >i< n n K o n  A. Fl.; Ill n n o n a  A. TI.   KasancK.
    MCA. >nypii.,  1936, j\? 2, cip.  H9.
  TarapnnoBa  H. B.  Bonpocw  niiraiiim,  1951, jYs  1, crp. G6.
  Mcpcnanoua  T. H. BCCTHIIK A MM CCCP, 19-16, B. 5,  crp.  27.
  3pMan  M. M. fur.  n can., 1959, jV« 7, crp.  75.
  B u 1 1 n e r M. E., Lenz E..  Arch.   Gewcrbepath.  u.  Gewcrbchyg.,
     1957, Bd.  7.
  Co u per  M. J.  chim. mcd. de  pharrnac., de tpxicol.  ct  revue  des
    nouvcllcs  sclentif. nation, ct etrangercs. Paris. 1837, v.  3.  Seric  II,
    p. 233.                  '   .       '
  Rudra  M. N. Nature.  1944, v. 153.  p. 743.      .     •    .      .
                                 -  148 -

-------
          MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE CONCENTRATIONS OF NOXIOUS SUBSTANCES

                  IN THE ATMOSPHERIC AIR OF POPULATED AREAS*
From "Biologicheskoe deystvie i gigienicheskoe znachenie atmosfernykh
zagryazneniy".   Pod redaktsiey Prof.  V.  A.  Ryazanova i Prof.  M.  S.  Gol'dberga.
Izdatel'stvo  "Meditsina" Moskva, p.  185-187,  (1966).
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Contaminant
Acrolein
Amyl acetate
Amylene
Aniline
Acetone
Acetophenone
Benzene
Low-sulfur gasoline in
terms of C
Butyl acetate
Butylene
Vinyl acetate
Hexamethylenediamine
Isopropylbenzene hydroperoxide
Dichlo roe thane
Dimethyl
Maximum Permissible
Concentrations mg/m.3
Maximum Single
0.30
0.10
1.5
0.05
0.35
0.003
2.4
5.0
0.1
3.0
0.2
0.001
0.007
3.0
0.03
Daily Average
0.10
0.10
1.5
0.03
0.35
0.003
0.80
1.5
0.1
3.0
0.2
-
-
1.0
0.03
 Approved by the Assistant Chief Physician of Public Health of the USSR on Kay 26, 1964.
                                      -  149 -

-------
                             (Cont'd)
No.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

23


24
25
26

27
28
29
30
31

32
33
Contaminant
Dow therm
Isopropylbenzene
Methanol
Methyl acetate
Maleic anhydride
Methyl methacrylate
Manganese and its compounds
(in terms of Mn02)
Arsenic [inorganic compounds
except hydrogen arsenide
(in terms of As) ]
Nitrobenzene
Carbon monoxide
Nitrogen oxides (in terms
of N205)
Propylene
Non toxic dust
Metallic mercury
Soot (carbon black)
Lead and its compounds
(except tetraethyl-lead)
Lead sulfide
Hydrogen sulfide
Maximum Permissible
Concentrations mg/m^
Maximum Single
0.01
0.014
1.5
0.07
0.5
0.1
-

"


0.008
6.0
0/3

3.0
0.5
-
0.15
-

-
0.008
Daily Average
0.01
-
0.5
0.07
0.05
0.1
0.01

0.03


0.008
1.0
0.1

3.0
0.15
0.0003
0.05
0.0007

0.0017
0.008
- 150 -

-------
                        (Cont'd)
No.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Contaminant
Sulfur dioxide
Sulfuric acid
Carbon disulfide
Sulfuric (in concentration
of H ions)
Hydrochloric
Nitric
Styrene
Formaldehyde
Toluylene diisocyanate
Phosphoric anhydride
Fluorine compounds (in terms
of F)
Phenol
Furfural
Chlorine
Chlorobenzene
Hydrogen chloride
Chloroprene (2-chloro-l,
3-butadiene)
Hexavalent chromium (in
terms of Cr03)
Maximum Permissible
Concentrations mg/m3
Maximum Single
0.5
0.3
0.03
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.003
0.035
0.05
0.15
0.03
0.01
0.05
0.10
0.1
0.05
0.25
0.0015
Daily Average
0.15
0.1
0.01
-
-
-
0.003
0.012
0.02
0.05
0.01
0.01
0.05
0.03
0.1
0.015
0.08
0.0015
- 151 -

-------
                                                          (Cont'd)
No.
52
53
54
55
Contaminant
Cyclohexanol
Cyclohexanone
Ethyl acetate
Ethylene
Maximum Permissible
Concentrations mg/m^
Maximum Single
0.06
0.04
0.1
3.0
Daily Average

-
0.1
3.0
Remarks.  1.  When several substances characterized by a complete summation
of action are present together in atmospheric air, the sum of their concen-
trations as calculated by the formula below should not exceed 1.

                             x = a + b_ + _c_ etc>
                                 m   m2  m^

where x is the unknown total concentration; .§., b., £.  are the concentrations
                                            m  m2 mo
of the substance being determined divided by the corresponding maximum per-
missible concentration for isolated action.

       Substances characterized by such action include the following groups:

       a) sulfur dioxide and sulfuric acid aerosol;
       b) hydrogen sulfide, carbon disulfide and Dowtherm;
       c) isopropylbenzene and isopropylbenzene hydroperoxide;
       d) ethylene, propylene, butylene and amylene;
       e) strong mineral acids (sulfuric, hydrochloric and nitric) in terms
of the concentration of H ions.
       2.  When hydrogen sulfide and carbon disulfide are present together in
atmospheric air, the maximum permissible concentrations for each of them
individually are preserved.

       3.  Lists of indexes of maximum permissible concentrations of noxious
substances in the atmospheric air of populated areas, approved on 14 February
1961 for Nos. 221-61 on 13 April 1962, and since 20 June 1963 for Nos .  442-63
should be considered as no longer in force.
                                  -  152 -

-------